giao an anh van 8 toan tap

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (936.51 KB, 197 trang )

(1)WEEK 1 Period 1. Teaching date: August 17th, 2011. Revision / Introduce English 8 A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to review the knowledge that Ss have known and how to learn New English 8 to follow up 4 skills : Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing. B/ Language Content: - Review the knowledge that Ss have known at grade 7. + Comparison + Simple past tense - How to learn New English 8 to follow up 4 skills C/ Teaching aids: Text books, poster. D/Techniques: pair work, group work. E/ Procedures: I/ Revision: (24’) 1. Presentation: - T asks Ss to remind some main grammar points that they have known at grade 7. - Ss write on board. - T helps Ss to correct the mistakes if needed. 2. Practice: - T asks Ss to do the exercise in pairs. Task 1: Use the comparison to complete the sentences. a. His father is 1.70m tall. His mother is 1.60m tall. His mother is shorter than his father. B. Bad are 18 years old. Nam is 16 years old. Nam is younger than Ba. c. No one in my class is cleverer than Huy. Huy is the cleverest student in my class. d. The yellow shirt is cheaper than the green shirt. The green shirt is more expensive than the yellow shirt. - T-ss get feedback . Task 2: Give the past form of the verb in bracket. a. He lived in England at the time his sister (live)………. in Japan.( lived) b. When he was younger, he (like) ……… to play chess. (liked) c. We (hurry)………..into the house as it was raining heavily. (hurried) d. Last year she (be)……….1.50m tall. (was) e. I (see)………..the cat caught the mouse.(saw) f. Nhan and his family (go)………….to Hanoi in 1998.(went) - Ss write the answer on board. - T –ss get feed feedback. II/ Introduce the form of New Tieng Anh 8 : (20’) - T. gives Ss some questions about textbook and gets Ss to answer (in 5 minutes) 1. How many units are there in TA 8? (16) 2. How many parts are there in each unit? (7) What are they? (They are: Getting Started, Listen and read, speak, listen, read, write and Language focus) 3. How many skills does each lesson have? (4) What are they? (L – S – W – R) 4. How many topics are there in this book? (6) 5. Can you give name some topics in this book?.

(2) (Friends, arrangements, at home, our past, habits, the young pioneers club) * The main grammar - be going to, not ( adj ) + enough + to – inf - Modals: must, have to, ought to ........ - Past Simple - Used to - Passive forms - Past Progessive............. * How do you learn English well? - Learn vocabulary by heart - Practice structures - Practice listening to the tape, the radio..... Speaking with your classmates - Learn grammar - Read stories / magazine........ - Do exercises............ III/ Homework: (1’) - Revise the past simple tense, be going to... - Prepare Unit 1: Getting Started + Listen and read * Guide: - Look at the pictures on page 10; show what they are doing in each picture - Describe them and show what topic they belong to - read through the dialogue ********************************************************************************* WEEK 1 Teaching date: August 18th, 2011 Period 2. Unit 1: My friends Lesson 1: Getting Started + Listen and read A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to - introduce people and respond to introductions. - describe people’s appearance. - know the usage of the structure : (not) Adj + enough + to Infinitive. B/ Language Content: 1. Vocabulary: seem, next-door neighbor, look like, classmate. 2. Grammar - Simple Present - Simple Past C/ Teaching aids: Text books, tape, cassette, picture, poster D/Techniques: individual, pair work, group work. E/Procedures: I/ Warm up: (5’) Hangman FRIENDS - Ss play the game in 2 teams. - T congratulates the winner. - T asks Ss to talk about the games they like to play with their friend. Ex: We like playing chess. / Soccer/ volleyball. -T leads into new lesson. II/ Presentation: (15’) - T hangs on the picture and asks Ss some questions. a. How many people are there in the picture?.

(3) b.Who are they? Where are they? - Ss answer. - T sets the scene: Hoa is talking to Lan about her friend, Nien. - T elicits ss some words. 1. (to) seem: 2. (to) look like : 3. a next- door neighbor (n) 4. classmate (n) * Check vocabulary: What and Where . - play the tape ( x2) - get some pairs to read the dialogue in silence - check 2 pairs III. Practice: (15’) - T gets Ss to read the dialogue( P.10) again and find out the answers. * LUCKY NUMBERS - Give instructions & check instruction : * Answer key: 1.a She lives in Hue. 2. LN ! 3. b No, she doesn't. 4.c '' She wasn't old enough to be in my class '' 5. LN ! 6.d. She is going to visit Hoa at Christmas. * New Structures - T elicits the model from the dialogue. Ex : She wasn't old enough to be in my class. Nam is old enough to go to school. --> Concept check: - meaning: How do you say this sentence in English? - Form: S + BE (NOT) + ADJ/ ADV + ENOUGH + TO – INF S + V + ENOUGH + NOUN + TO – INF( DÀNH CHO LỚP A) Ex: Mai has enough money to buy a new car. - T helps ss to know the usage of this structure. III/ Production : (10’) - T hangs on the chart and asks ss to do the exercises. a. Peter / strong / carry this box. b. They / old/ go to school. c. You/ intelligent/ do these exercises. d. Water/ warm / drink. e. Mai/ not old/ see that film. f. Hang / study / well / enough / get / high marks. g. We/ have / enough/ experience/ do / job. - Run through vocabulary. - T. models first Ex: Peter is strong enough to carry this box. - Ss do the exercise in pairs. - Ss write on board. - T – ss get feedback. a. Peter is strong enough to carry this box. b. They are oldenough to go to school. c. You are intelligent enough to do these exercises. d. Water is warm enough to drink..

(4) e. Mai is not old enough to see that film. f. Hang studies well enough to get high marks. g. We have enough experience to do the job. - T describes 2 people in the school. - Ss listen and guess who they are. (Mr. Tuan and Mrs.Nga) IV/ Homework (2’) - Learn by heart the newwords - Summarize the dialogue using Qs (II) - Prepare '' Speak '' P. 11 - 12 **Guide : - Revise the adjectives that decribe person: tall, short, fat.......... - read through the section SPEAK : the dialgue on page 11 Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. ********************************************************************* WEEK 1 Teaching date : August 19th, 2011. Period 3. Unit 1 : My friends Lesson 2: Speak ( P.10 – 11 ) A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to - describe someone by practice speaking, respond to instruction. - develop Ss' speaking skill. B/ Language Content : 1. Vocabulary: thin , short, straight, blond, curly, dark, blond/ fair. 2.Grammar: Simple Present Tense. C/ Teaching aids : Text books, picture, poster. D/Techniques : pairwork , groupwork. E/ Procedures: I. Check- up (5’) - Ss write the words and their meaning on the board. (to) seem, (to) look like ,a next- door neighbor , classmate . - T descibes 2 students in the classroom and ss guess who they are. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II/ Warm up : (3’) Brainstorming -Ss play in 2 teams.( go to the b.b in turn and write ) - Get Ss to think of the adjectives used to describe body build and hair thin black curly big hair body build. tall. brown. blond II/ Presentation : (10’) - T sets the sence: Today we will use some adectives to describe people’s appearance and practice speaking. - T shows Ss the picture of Mary and ask them to describe her hair and body build..

(5) - T checks and add some more new words to the '' brainstorming '' + slim(adj) = thin + straight (adj) : + curly (adj) : + dark (adj) = black: + blond/ fair (adj) --> Check vocabulary: R.O. R - Ss listen and repeat * Model Sentences - T elicits the model from Ss Ex : She is short and thin./ She has long blond hair Form: S + BE + ADJ S + HAVE / HAS + ADJ + HAIR III/ Practice Speaking : (15’) 1) Word Cue on six cards a. He / tall/ thin long / black b. She / short / slim curly/ blond c. she / short / fat straight / brown d. He / tall / fat curly / black + Run through vocab + T. models the first cue ( with one St ) Ex: He is tall and thin He has long black hair ** Answer key: b) She is short and slim./ She has curly blond hair. c) She is short and fat./ She has straight brown hair. d) He is tall and fat./ He has curly black hair. - SS present their roles. - T- ss get feedback. IV/ Production : (7’) Show the poster of six people - T calls on a St to describe one person and the other have to guess who he / she is Ex: T: This person is short and thin She has long blond hair St: Is this Mary? T : Yes - go on until six people on the poster are described - get Ss to describe some teachers or friends and the other guess V/ Homework : (1) - Describe the people in your family and write in your ex- book Eg: There are four people in my family: My mother, my father, my brother and me. My mother is tall and slim. She has long back hair. She is a teacher. - Do Ex 3 in the ex - book - Prepare '' Listen '' P.12 - 13 ** Guide : - Read the phrases or sentenses in the box on page 12 - Read the dialogue on page 12 & 13 - Predict which sentence or phrase is suitable for any blank.

(6) Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................ ******************************************************************************** WEEK 2 Period 4. Teaching date : August 24th, 2011. Unit 1 : My friends Lesson 3: Listen A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to - listen to dialogues for specific information and complete the brackets. - develope Ss' listening skill. B/ Language Content : 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: + Present and Past Simple + Expressions C/ Teaching aids : Text books, tape, cassette. D/Techniques : pairwork , groupwork. E/ Procedures: I / Check- up : (7’) - Two ss go to the board ask and answer to describe people’ appearrance. a. Is your mother / father tall / short? Yes / No b. What does your mother / father look like ? ( She / he is beautiful / handsome ) c. How old is she / he ? Etc,……….. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II/ Pre – listening : ( 10’) - Get Ss to look at the book ( P.12 ) and make sure they know their meanings. - get Ss to guess and complete 4 dialogues on P.12 – 13 using given expression. - give Ss 4' to predict. - collect Ss' predictions. III/ While – listening : (15’) - play the tape twice. - get Ss to pair - compare. - check prediction. (1) I’d like to you to meet (2) Nice to meet you (3) I’d like to you to meet (4) It’s pleasure to meet you (5) Come and meet (6) How do you do? IV/ Post – listening: ( 15’) - Role play to practice the dialogues P.12 – 13 - Correct their pronunciation - Let Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogues ( closed pairs ) - Ss make the similar dialogue. - Ss present..

(7) - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. V/ Consolidation: ( 2’) - Ss remind the usage and the meaning of the expressions above. VI/ Homework ( 1’) - Write the paragraph ( LF 1 ) into the notebooks. - Prepare " Read '' P.13 * Guide : - Revise the present simple tense - Describe the members in your family Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... ********************************************************************************* Week 2 Teaching date : August 25th, 2011 Period 5. Unit 1 : My friends Lesson 4: Read A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to - read for specific information, know more about Ba's friends. - develop ss’ reading skill. B/ Language Content : 1. Vocabulary: character, sociable, generous, reserved, outgoing, volunteer, sense of humor, jokes. 2. Grammar: Present Simple Tense C/ Teaching aids : Text books, charts. D/Techniques : pairwork , groupwork. E/ Procedures: I/ Check- up : (5’) - T get Ss to describe the member of their family. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II/ Pre – reading: (15’) - Set the scene: Show the picture on page 13 .This is Ba. Ba is talking about his friends. - T asks: + How many close friends does Ba have? + What are they like? + What do they like? + What do they enjoy doing in their freetime? + Do they all have the same favorite activities? - Ss answer. - T leads into new lesson. - T presents some words. - Ss pronounce words. - T gets feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. * Now read these statements ( on the poster ) and guess which statements are true and which are false. a. Ba has only three friends : Bao, Song , Khai. b. Ba and his friends have the same characters c. Bao, Song, Khai are reserved in public d. They all enjoy school and study hard + T gives instructions . + T gives Ss 4 minutes to read the statements and predict. + T collects Ss' predictions..

(8) III/ While – reading: (15’) - T gets Ss to read the text to check their pediction and correct the false sentences. - T gets ss to pair – compare. * Answer Key: a. F a lot of friends b. F different characters c. f only Khai and Song d. T 1) Multipe choice ( P.14 ) - get Ss to read the text to do the exercise on P.14 - T – ss get feedback. Answer Key: a. A b. C c. B d. D 2) Comprehension Questions - get Ss to read the text again to find out the answers. - give Ss 2 minutes to work in pairs. - Ss present their roles. - - T –ss get feedback. * Answer Key: a. Ba feel luckey having a lot of friends b. Bao is the most sociable. c. Khai likes reading. d. His jokes sometimes annoy his friends. e. Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at a local orphanage. f. ( Ss' answers ) IV/ Post – reading: (7’) - Get Ss work in group to talk to one another about their friends using the adjectives they've just learned to describe. - Ss present their roles. - T –ss get feedback. V/ Consolidation: (2’) - T asks ss to retell the content of the reading text. - T asks ss some questions to check their understanding. + How many close friends does Ba have? + What are they like? + What do they like? + What do they enjoy doing in their freetime? + Do they all have the same favorite activities? VI/Homework : (1’) - Learn by heart the newwords - Write Ex 1,2 ( P.14 ) in your exercise book - Prepare '' Write '' P.15 ** Guide : - Revise the Vocabulary that shows the charater of a person - Read the paragraph describing Le Van Tam on page 15 Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... ******************************************************************************** Week 2 Teaching date : August 26th, 2011 Period 6.

(9) Unit 1 : My friends Lesson 5: Write A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to - write a description about oneself and write a paragraph about their close friends using word cue. - develop Ss' writing skill. B/ Language Content : B/ Language Content : 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar: - Present Simple Tense - use adjectives of description and characters C/ Teaching aids : Text books, chart. D/Techniques : pairwork , individual. E/ Procedures: I/ Check- up : (5’) - Ss write the new words and answer the questions. + In the last period we've known Ba has a lot of friends. 1. Who are they? 2. What are characters? 3. Do you think they are good characters ? II/ Pre – writing: (12’) - Set the scene : Tam is one of Ba's best friends. Now you're going to read the information about Tam then answer some questions. - Give Ss 2 minutes to predict. T-ss get feedback. **Questions(chart) : a. What is his name? ( Le Van Tam ) b. How old is he ? ( 14 ) c. What does he look like? ( He is tall and thin. He has short black hair ) d. What is he like ? ( character ) ( He is sociable, humorous and helpful ) e. Where does he live/ What is his address / ( He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street, Ha Noi ) f. Whom does he lives with? ( He lives with his mother, father and elder brother ) g. Who is his best friend ? ( Ba and Bao ) III/ While – writing: (15’) - Let Ss write a paragraph about Tam, using the information they have just got then compare with the paragraph in their books on P.15. - Ask Ss to write some information about one of their friends then write a paragraph about him or her. - Get Ss to share with partner and correct if possible. * Sample: His/ her name is ........... and he / she is ............. years old. He / she lives at ......... in .......... with his grandmother, his parents and his younger sister, Mai. He / she is tall and slender. He / she has ............ He / she rather shy but friendly and helpful. He / she has a lot of friends but his / her close friends are ......... and ................ - Ss wtite individually. IV/ Post – writing (10’) - Ask each St to write a similar paragraph about himself/ herself *Eg :I'm Hoa. I'm 14 yearsold. I live in Codung with my parents and my elder sister............ - T moves around and takes notes then ask some Ss to speak in front of the class about himself/ herself. - T – ss get feedback. V.Consolidation: (2’).

(10) - T asks ss to retell some adjectives using to write a description about oneself and write a paragraph about their close friends. VI/ Homework : (1’) - Write another paragraph about one their family members - Do Ex7 in the ex- book P.12 - Prepare '' Language focus 2,3,4 '' P.16 - 17 ** Guide : - Revise the present simple tense, the present progressive tense, the past simple tense. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ........................................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................................... WEEK 3 Period 7. Teaching date : August 31st, 2011. Unit 1 : My friends Lesson 6: Language focus A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get further practice in Simple Present Tense to talk about general truths and write some sentences using the structure '' (not) + adj enough + to – infinitive''. B/ Language Content : 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: - Simple Present - (not) + adj enough + to – inf C/ Teaching aids : Text books, chart. D/Techniques : pairwork , groupwork. E/ Procedures: I/ Check- up : (5’) - T collects some paragraphs that ss write at home to mark. II. Warm up : Kim's Game( Language Focus 3 )(7’) - T asks Ss to look at the picture on P.17 in 20 seconds and ask them to answer 3 questions a. How many people are there in the picture? b. What is each person wearing? c. What does each person look like? * Answer Key: a.There are 4 people in the picture b.The man standing next to the taxi is wearing a yellow shirt and black trousers ( tall, heavy man ) + The woman is carrying a shoulder bag, and is wearing a green skirt and red blouse ( tall, thin / short hair ) + The boy sittting on the ground and holding his head is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt + The man cross the street is wearing blue trousers and a pink shirt ( short man ).

(11) III/ Presentation: (5’) - Revision of Simple Present Tense - Gets Ss to give the form Form: S + V(s/ es ) + O - Asks ss to give the usage of the simple present tense. - Asks ss to remind the using of the structure '' (not) + adj enough + to – infinitive''. - T sets the scene to draw the structure - form: S + BE ( NOT ) + ADJ ENOUGH + TO – INF - T- ss get feedback. IV/ Practice: (17’) 1) Complete the paragraph.Use the correct form.(LF1) - T asks ss to do the exercise in pairs. - Ss write the answer on board. - T-ss get feedback. a.(1) lives (2)sent (3) was (4)is b. (1) are (2)came (3) shows (4) introduces 2) Complete the dialogue : (LF3) - T helps Ss to get the meaning of verbs : be – move – set – rise – go -T asks ss to do the exercise in pair. - Ss write the answer on board. - T-ss get feedback. * Answer Key: 1. sets 4. is 2. goes 5. is 3. moves 6. is - get Ss practice the dialogue in pairs 3) Complete the dialogue ( L. F 4 - P.17 ) Practice : Word Cue Drill a. read English books /  good b. drive a car / x old c. carry this bag /  strong d. slove this problem / x clever + Run through vocabulary. + T models the first cue and the second cue Ex: a) Can you read English books ? Yes, My English is good enough to read E books. a) Can you drive a car ? No, I'm not old enough to drive a car . - get Ss to practice the first to the rest cue.(groupwork) - Ss write the the answer on board. - T-ss get feedback. - T asks Ss to practice the dialogue b. Ba is old enoug to drive a car. c.I’m strong enough to lift the box. d.I don’t think my English is good enough to be a member. V/ Production: (10’) - Asks ss to talk about what they often do in a week(groupwork). - Ss presents their roles. - T-ss get feedback. - Asks Ss to complete the sentences from the cues. 1. He / old / enough / drink / coffee. 2. Nhan / tall / enough / touch / ceiling..

(12) 3. We / strong / enough / swim in / cold water. 4. Mai / have/ enough / money / buy / new house. - Ss do the exercise in pairs. - T-ss get feedback. 1. He is old enough to drink coffee. 2. Nhan is tall enough to touch the ceiling. 3. We are strong enough to swim in the cold water. 4. Mai has enough money to buy a new house. VII/ Homework: (1’) - Do Ex 1,2,4 in the ex - book - Prepare Unit 2 : Getting Started + Listen and read Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 3 Period 8. Teaching date : September 1st,2011. Unit 2 : Making arragements Lesson 1: Getting Started + Listen and read A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the telephone to make and confirm arragements. - Develop Ss' listening and reading skills B/ Language Content : 1.Vocabulary: directory, mobile, arrangement. + Hold on + Where's it on ? + Is 6.30 all right ? 2.Grammar: - be + going to ......... C/ Teaching aids : Text books, pictures, chart. D/Techniques : pairwork , groupwork. E/ Procedures: I/ Warm up : (5’)Matching - Asks Ss to match each object with its name ( pictures on P.18 ) - Gives Ss 3 minutes to match. - Gets feedback and corrects. * Answer Key: a. an answering machine : b. a mobile phone : c. a fax machine : d. a telephone directory: e. a public telephone : f. an address book : - Gives the definitions of these objects on a poster and asks Ss to match the object with its definition 1. to send fax 2. to find someone's telephone number 3. to write address and telephone numbers 4. to make a phone call in a street telephone box.

(13) 5. to leave and take messages. 6. to make phone call anywhere you like. * Answer Key: a–5 b–6 c–1 d–2 e–4 f–3 II/ Listen and repea 1:Presentation : (15’) - T sets the scene: Hoa and Nga are talking on the phone. They are talking about going to see a movie. - T asks Ss some questions ? what would you say when you pick up the phone to answer it? ? What would you say if you are the caller? - get Ss to read the dialogue in silent - check 2 pairs - T explains some phrases and words. - T helps ss to pronounce words. 2: Practice: (15’) - Ss listen to the tape twice. - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs - T –ss get feedback. - T gets Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers to the 4 questions.(pairworks) Answer Key: a. Nga made the call b. Nga introduced herself c. Nga invited Hoa to the movies d. Nga arranged a meeting place e. Hoa arranged the time f. Nga agreed to the time. * Task 3: Model Sentences - T elicits Ss give the model from the dialogue Ex: I'm going to see the movies - form: S + BE GOING TO + V – inf - T helps ss to know thw usage of “Be going to” Practice : Word Cue Drill a. Lan / watch TV b. I / do my homework c. My mother / water the garden d. We / play soccer + Run through vocabulary. + T models the first cue. Ex: Lan is going to watch TV IV/ Production : (7’)Mapped Dialogue - T sets the scene and give instructions . - T models first with one St. Lan Mai 854146 .............. to Lan, please movie/ 7.30 / this morning Would .......... come? Where ........ on ? Thang Tam Movie Theater Let's ........... by……. OK! .......... meet outside ½ OK ? ü ! See you... ! Bye !. Bye !.

(14) - Make the dialogue between Lan and Mai using '' Mapped Dialogue''.(groupwork) - Ss present - T-ss get feedback. V.Consolidation : (2’) - Ss retell the form and the usage of “ BE GOING TO”. VI/ Homework : (1’) - Do Ex 2,3 in the ex- book P.14 - 15 - Prepare '' Speak '' - Revise the future with "Be going to" Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 3 Period 9. Teaching date : September 2nd,2011. Unit 2 : Making arragements Lesson 2: Speak A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk on the telephone about intentions with BE GOING TO B/ Language Content : 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: - Be going to + inf..... C/ Teaching aids : Text books, chart. D/Techniques : pairwork , groupwork. E/ Procedures : I/ Check- up : (5’) - Ss write the words that they have learn last period. - T gets feedback and give marks. II/ Pre-speaking : (15’) Chatting - Talks to Ss about using telephone 1. Do you telephone at home ? 2. How often do you take a phone call ? 3. What would you say when you pick up the phone to answer it ? 4. What would you say if you are the caller? * Ordering - T sets the scene : Adam calls the phone to Eric. They are talking about going to a pop concert. - Asks Ss to read and put the sentences into the correct order to make a complete conversation. - Gives Ss 5 minutes to read and order in group. - Ss give the answer. - T- ss get feedback. * Answer Key: 1–b 2–f 3–j 4–a 5–i 6–c 7–e 8–k 9–g 10 – h 11 – d III/ Speaking : (15’)Word Cue Drill a. see a movie x b. help your mother  c. meet your friends x.

(15) d. do your homework  e. play soccer x + Run through vocabulary. + T. models the first cue ( with one St ) Are you going to see a movie ? ( Yes, I am / No, I'm not ) - Gets Ss to practice the first to the rest cue. IV/ Production : (7’)Roleplay ( speak 2 ) - sets the scene : '' Ba and Bao are making arrangements to play chess '' - Asks Ss to work with their partners to complete the dialogue - gives feedback * Answer Key: - May I speak to Ba, please. This is Bao - I'm fine. Thanks and you ? - Can you play chess tonight? - What about tomorrow afternoon? - I'll meet you at the Central Chess Club. - Is 2.00 o'clock OK ? + Asks Ss to play the roles of Ba and Bao to practice the dialogue. V.Consolidation: (2’) - Asks ss to retell the form and the usage of “BE GOING TO” to make plan. VI/ Homework (1’) - Write 5 things that you intend to do next week - Do Ex1,4 i the ex - book - Prepare '' Listen '' ( P.21 – 22 ) Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 4 Period 10. Teaching date : September 5th,2011. Unit 2 : Making arragements Lesson 3: Listen A/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to + complete the missing information. + develop ss listening skill. B/ Language Content : 1.Vocabulary: junior, leave a message, appointment, secretary. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Text books, chart. D/Techniques : pairwork , groupwork. E/ Procedures : I/ Check- up : (5’) - Ss Write 3 things that you intend to do next week. - T-ss get feedback. - T gives marks. II.Pre-listening: (12’).

(16) -. T sets the scene :You are going to listen to the dialogue between the woman and a secretary.You must find the information to complete the missing. - T presents some new words. - Ss pronounce words. - T – ss get feedback. - T asks ss to guess the answer to complete the box.(groupwork) - Ss give the predict. III.Listening: (20’) - Ss listen to the tape . - Ss give the answer. - T –ss get feedback. Answer key: Date : ss’ answer Time: ss’ answer For: the principal Message: Mrs. Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9.45 in the morning. Tel. number: 64683720942 IV.Post-listening: (10’) - T asks ss to make the dialogue basing on the information that they have listened. - Ss make the dialogue in pairs. - Ss present their roles. - T-ss get feedback. V.Consolidation: (2’) - Ss retell the information often get in the message record. VI.Homework : (1’) - Prepare the next part of the lesson: Read Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 4 Period 11. Teaching date : September 6th,2011. Unit 2 : Making arragements Lesson 4: Read A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + know more about Alexander Graham Bell . + develop ss ‘ reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary:emigrate,deaf-mute,transmit,conduct,device,demonstrate, exhibition,counlesscommercial use. 2.Grammar: Simple past tense C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , pictures of Bell . D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Brainstorming - Lets Ss answer the questions by coming to the board and write : To chat with friend.

(17) What is the telephone used for ?.  Possible answers : - to have a message - to call someone - to make arrangements - to talk to a person who lives far from - to get information at the airport or railway station quickly II / Pre - reading : ( 15’)Chatting ?Who invented the telephone? ?When was he borned? ?When did he invented the telephone? - Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss . - to emigrate = to go another country to live - to transmit ( translation ) - to conduct = to carry out - to demonstrate ( translation ) - a device ( translation ) - a deaf – mute = a person who is unable to hear and speak . - Has ss pronounce words. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistake in pronunciation if needed. * Checking vocabulary : What and where * T / F statements prediction : - Hangs the poster of T / F statements on the board and ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which statements are true or false . a. Alexander G. Bell was born in the USA b. He worked with deaf – mute patients in a hospital in Boston . c. Thomas Watson was Bell,s assistant. d. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1877 . e. Bell experimented his invention at a lot of exhibitions . - Calls on some pairs to read their predictions and write them on the board . III / While - reading : (17’) * True or false : - Asks ss to look at their books to read the text , then check their prediction Guess Answer Correction a b c d e. F F T F F. He was born in Edinburgh in Scotland He worked with deaf – mute patients at Boston University He introduced telephone in 1876 He experimented with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. f T - Asks some Ss to read the correct answers aloud . * Ordering :.

(18) - Asks Ss to look at the exercise and read the events of Bell,s life , then put them in the correct order . - Has them compare with their partners - Calls on some Ss to read their answers aloud . - Corrects and gives feedback = > Alexander Graham Bell 1. Was born in Scotland 2. went to live in Canada 3. went to live in the USA 4. worked with people who could neither speak nor hear 5. worked with Thomas Watson 6. successfully demonstrate his invention 7. invented the telephone . - Calls on some Ss to read all the correct order sentences aloud . IV / Post - reading : (7’) Writing it up - Gets Ss to write a paragraph about Bell,s life , using the information from the text . - Calls on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class . - Corrects mistakes if any and gives Suggestions : V / Homework : (1’) 1. Copy down their writings . 2. Do the exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 4 Period 12. Teaching date: September 9th, 2011 Unit 2:MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Lesson 5 : Write. A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + write a telephone message . + develop ss’ writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: custumer, stationary, delivery. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I.Check –up: (5’) - Ss go to the board to write and read the words in the last reading text. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (5’) Jumbled words 1. mcuestor = customer 2. ayddmi = midday 3. essgmea = message 4. nifurretu = furniture 5. rvseice = service II / Pre - writing : (7’) – Talks to Ss about taking a telephone message  Have you ever taken a message ?.

(19)  When you take a message ?  what should be mentioned in the message ? ( Date , time who sent , to whom , content ) -From ss’ answer ,T presents some words. - a customer = a person who comes to buy something at a shop . - a delivery - stationery ( papers ,pens , pencils , rulers .. ) - to pick someone up - T helps ss to pronounce words. T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation. * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember III / While - writing : ( 20’) 1. Reading and gap filling - Asks Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps in the message . - Asks them to work in pairs - Calls on some Ss to read their answers aloud . - Corrects and gives feed back  Answers : A customer phoned the Thang Loi Delivery Service on May 12 just before midday . She wanted to speak to Mr Ha but he was out . So Mr Tam took a message for Mr Ha . The customer,s name was Mrs . Lien and she wanted to know about her furniture delivery . She wanted Mr Ha to call her . She said Mr Ha could reach her at 8645141 after lunch . - AsksSs to read the passage 2 to get information and write the message . - Lets Ss write individually then share with a partner . - Calls on some Ss to read their answers - Corrects and gives feedback . * Answers : Thanh Cong Delivery Service Date : June 16 Time : After midday For : Mrs Van Message : Mr Nam called about his stationery order . He wanted you to call him at 8634082 Taken by : Mr Toan . - Asks Ss to write another message , using the scene “ Tom phoned Nancy , but she was out . Lisa , Nancy , s sister took a message for Nancy . Help Lisa to write a message “ - Asks Ss to read the dialogue between Lisa and Tom , write the message. - Lets Ss work in pairs . IV / Post - writing : (7’) - Calls on some Ss to read their answers aloud - Corrects and gives feedback * Answers : Date : ( .....................) Time : ( .....................) For : Nancy Message : Tom called about playing tennis this afternoon. He will come over to pick you up at 1.30 Taken by : Lisa V / Homework : (1’) 1. Copy the message on their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................................

(20) Week 5 Period 13. Teaching date: September 12th, 2011 Unit 2:MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Parts of lesson : Language focus. A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + talk about intentions with be going to. + know how to use Adverbs of place . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: + Be going to + Vinf + Adverbs of place C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters,chalks. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Telephone transmitting II / New lesson : Activity 1: (24’) Talk about intentions with going to : Introduce the form and use of going to - Form : S + be going to + infinitive - Use : express an intention Ex 1 : - Asks Ss to do exercise 1 . They have to work with a partner and say what the people are going to do - Example : T : Nga has a movie ticket . What is she going to do ? S : She is going to see a movie . - Calls on some pairs to read their sentences aloud . - Corrects and gives feedback : a. They are going fishing b. She is going to read the new model c. She is going to do her homework . d. He is going to watch an action movie on TV tonight . e. She is going to give him a birthday present . Ex 2 : Complete the list ( Questionnaire ) a) Asks Ss to work in pairs - Calls on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class . - Listens and gives feedback . b) Gets Ss to work in pairs - Has some pairs demonstrate in front of class . - Gives feedback . Activity 2: Adverbs of place (15’) * Jumbled words - Let Ss work individually , one student one word 1. tdeousi = outside 2. siiden = inside 3. hetre = there 4. erhe = here.

(21) 5. stupairs = upstairs 6. wonstaird = downstairs - Asks Ss to go to the board and write the meanings words . - Calls on some Ss to read all the adverbs aloud . Ex 3 : Complete the speech bubbles . Use each adverb in the box once . - Sets the scene : “ Ba is playing hide and seek with his cousin , Mr Tuan “ - Lets Ss work in pairs , then compare with another pair ( at their table ) - Calls on some Ss to read out the speech bubbles - Gives feedback a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is upstairs b. No , he is not here . c. He is not downstairs and he is not upstairs . d. Perhaps , he is outside . e. No , he is not there . f. I am not outside . I am inside , Ba. - Calls on some Ss to read the complete sentences III / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Write six sentences about your house , using adverbs of place . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 5 Period 14. Teaching date: September 13th, 2011 Unit 3: AT HOME Parts of lesson : Getting started + Listen and Read. A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and use modal verbs to talk about the housework. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: a steamer, a cup board, a sauce pan,chore, a sink . 2.Grammar: Modal verbs: Have to, Ought to C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette, pictures. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I/Check up: (5’) -2 Ss go to the board and make 2 sentences with BE GOING TO. -T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (7’) Kim,s game ( Getting started ) - Shows 6 pictures to Ss and ask them to look at 6 pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to remember the verbs in the pictures as many as possible - Which team remembering more verbs is the winner.  Answer : a. Wash dishes / do the washing up b. Make the bed c. Sweep the floor d. Cook e. Tidy up f. Feed the chicken.

(22) - T leads into new lesson. II / Presentation : (10’) - Sets the scene of the dialogue between Nam and his mother, Mrs Vui . + What is Mrs Vui going to do? + Will Nam help his Mom to do the housework? - From Ss’ answer, T introduces the topic of the passage and some new words. - a steamer - a cup board - a sauce pan - chore - a sink - T helps ss to pronounce words. - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation. III.Practice: (15’) - Asks Ss to complete the list of the things Nam has to do . - Turns on the tape and asks Ss to look at their books and read their complete sentences : - cook dinner . Nam has to - go to the market to buy fish and vegetables. - call his Aunt , Ms Chi and ask her to meet his mother at grandma,s house -> Form : Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + Infinitive Model : What do you have to do ? I must do the washing up . -> Use the picture cues drill : a. do the washing up b. make the bed c. sweep the floor d. cook dinner e. tidy my room f. feed the chickens - Calls on some Ss to practice in front of class * Has Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs . III / Production : ( 7’) - Asks Ss to write the lists of the things they have to do on Sundays . Beginning with : On Sunday morning , I have to tidy my room ............. - Calls on some Ss to read their writings in front of class. - Corrects mistakes if any and asks them to copy . IV/ Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart all new words they have learnt . 2. Do their exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 5 Period 15. Teaching date: September 16th, 2011 Unit 3:AT HOME Parts of lesson : Speak.

(23) A / Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the prepositions of places to talk about the positions in the house . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: rug,cushion ,knife. 2.Grammar: prepositions. C/ Teaching aids : pictures. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Pre - Speaking (15’) Kim,sgame - Divides the class into 2 teams - Shows the picture of a kitchen to Ss . - Asks them to study the things in the picture - Takes away the picture and asks Ss to write down as many things as they can remember . - Which team having more things win games . - T asks ss to give the prepositions of place. On opposite prepositions In next - T presents some new words. - T helps ss to pronounce words. - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation. III / While - speaking : ( 15’) - T asks ss to look at the picture ,ask and answer about the positions of the items in the pictures . Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge . Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl . Where is the flowers ? They are on the table . Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the bowl of fruit . Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above the counter . Where are the knives ? They are on the wall , under the cupboard . Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter , next to the bowl of fruit . - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. - Gets Ss to work in pairs , talking about the position of each item Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the stove . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class. - Give feedback : + The sink is next to the stove . + The cupboard is on the wall , above the counter . + The knives are on the wall , under the cupboard . + The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and the dish rack . + The clock is on the wall , above the fridge . + The flowers are on the table . - Asks them to read all the suggested sentences aloud . - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. IV / Post - speaking : (14’) - Sets the scene : Mrs Vui bought new furniture for her living room , but she can not decide where to put it . You should help her to arrange the furniture” - Asks Ss to look at the picture and talk about their ideas .  Ask Ss to practice speaking : - If they agree , they may use : Ok.

(24) You are right If they disagree , they may use : No , I think we ,d better / ought to put ... I think it should be ... Example : - Let us put the clock on the wall , between the shelf and the picture . - OK . I think we ought to put the TV and the stereo on the shelf ….. - Calls on some pairs to practice speaking . - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if necessary. V / Homework : (1’) 1. Describe their living room or bedroom . 2. Do exercise 2 in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... -. Week 6 Period 16. Teaching date: September 19th, 2011 Unit 3:AT HOME Parts of lesson : Listen + test 15 minutes. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + identify the right item by listening . + develop ss listening skill. + Remind some grammar points that they have learn by doing the fifteen –minute test. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Cassette , textbooks , charts , .... D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Bingo - Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks 5 things you can eat . - Prepare a list of food . Then call out each word in a loud voice . - Ss listen to the teacher carefully . If anyone has the same things , they cross them out . The first person crossing out all 5 things shouts “ Bingo “ and wins the game .  Suggested list of food : Chickens , beef , cake , candy , garlic , noodles , bread , rice , ham , peas ... II / Pre - listening : ( 5’) * Predictions : - Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess 4 things they use to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice “ - Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . III / While - listening : (10’) - Turns on the tape 3 times and asks them to check their predictions . -T-Ss give feedback a. Fired Rice b. Pan c. Garlic and green peppers d. Ham and peas . - Turns on the tape once more to check the answers again . IV / Post - listening : (10’) Mapped dialogue ( chart).

(25) - Asks Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs Tu to make a dialogue by listening the tape again . Lan : Can I help ........................, Mom ? Mrs Tu : Sure you can cook ............................... Use the big pan please . Lan : ................................................? Mrs Tu : Just a little . Wait until it is hot and then fry the garlic and the green peppers . Lan : ...............................................? Mrs Tu : Yes . And you can put the rice and s teaspoon of salt in . Lan : YUmmy ! It smells ................. . - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class . - Corrects pronunciations if any . V/ Test 15’: ĐỀ A *Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1.That singer is tall and ............ a.long b.short c.slim d.straight 2.A home for children whose parents are dead is a(n)................... a.aquarium b.orphanage c.resort d.region 3.Alexander Graham Bell ...........first to Canada and then to the USA in 1870s. a.immigrated b.emigrated c.entered d.turned 4.They can neither speak nor hear.They are the .................... a.mute b.deaf c.deaf-mute d.deaf-mutes 5.Ngoc Khoi .................his birthday party next Saturday. a.has b.is having c.is going to have d.have 6.Clint ...............hide and seek with his friends at present. a.plays b.is playing c.is going to play d.will play 7.Modern life needs lots of electrical........................ a. devices b. directories c.materials d.drills 8.Trieu Vu ought ............to his parents more frequently. a.write b.to write c.writing d.written 9.Your friend Gerald left no...............for you at the hotel. a.stationery b.quizzes c.message d.sick note 10.Bell experimented...............ways of transmitting speech. a. on b.in c.at d.with 11.Don’t go out at night............it’s not safe outside. a. because b.so c.if d.when 12.He is not strong enough ...........the box. a.lift b.lifts c. lifted d.to lift *Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1.Maggie is just 6 years old.She can’t go to school alone. Maggie is not ................................................................................................................ 2.Don’t stay up late every night. You shouldn’t ................................................................................................................ 3.The number of people who own bikes is increasing. More and more people................................................................................................... 4.Never mind about the price, just buy it! The price.......................................................................................................................! ĐỀ B *Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1.She has long ............hair. a.thin b.short c.slim d.straight 2. Modern life needs lots of electrical.........................

(26) a.drills. b. materials. c. devices. d. directories. 3. Don’t go out at night............it’s not safe outside. a. when b. because c.if d. so 4. Cat Tuong ought ............to his parents more frequently. a.to write b.write c.written d.writing 5.Mai Huy.................his birthday party next Sunday. a.have b.has c.is having d.is going to have 6. He is not tall enough ...........the ceiling. a.touch b.touches c. to touch d. touched 7. .A home for children whose parents are dead is a(n)................... a. resort b. aquarium c. orphanage d.region 8. They can neither speak nor hear.They are the .................... a. deaf-mutes b. deaf-mute c. deaf d. mute 9.Your friend John left no...............for you at the hostel. a. message b. sick note c. stationery d. quizzes 10.Bell experimented...............ways of transmitting speech. a.at b.with c.on d.in 11. Alexander Graham Bell ...........first to Canada and then to the USA in 1870s. a. entered b. immigrated c. turned d. emigrated 12. Anna ...............hide and seek with his friends at present. a.to play b. played c.is going to play d.is playing *Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1.My sister is just 6 years old.She can’t ride a bike. My sister is not ............................................................................................................ 2.Don’t stay up late at night. You shouldn’t ............................................................................................................... 3.What’s your opinion of Kaka’s new book? What do .......................................................................................................................? 4.Sang has flu. Sang is........................................................................................................................... THE KEYS: ĐỀ A: *Choose the best answer : (0,5m x 12) 1c 2b 3b 4d 5c 6b 7a 8b 9c 10d 11a 12d *Rewrite the sentences: ( 2msx2 )(8A – 1m x 4) 1. Maggie is not old enough to go to school alone. 2. You shouldn’t stay up late every night. 3. More and more people are owning bikes. 4. The price doesn’t matter,just buy it! ĐỀ B: *Choose the best answer : (0,5m x 12) 1d 2c 3b 4a 5d 6c 7c 8a 9a 10b 11d 12d *Rewrite the sentences: ( 2msx2 )(8A – 1m x 4) 1.My sister is not old enough to ride a bike. 2.You shouldn’t stay up late at night. 3. What do you think of Kaka’s new book? 4. Sang is suffering from flu. VI / Homework : (1’) - Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................................

(27) Teaching date: September 22nd, 2011. Week 6 Period 17. Unit 3:AT HOME Parts of lesson : Read A / Aims and Objectives :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + understand the safety precautions in the house and use Why- because. + + develop ss reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: precaution , socket,match,object,safety ,destroy , injure . 2.Grammar: Why – Because. C/ Teaching aids :Cassette, textbooks , charts , pictures,realias. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : ( 5’) Brainstorming  Possible answers : drug ,electricity ,boiling water ,fire ,gas,knife. Danger in the home for children. - Ask them to copy down . II / Pre - reading : (10’) - From the part “Warm –up” ,T introduces the topic of the reading passage and some new words to Ss. - Ss guess the meaning of new words. - T helps ss to pronounce words. - T- Ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. - Asks ss to remind the question with Why...? and answer with Because.... *True / false statements predictions : ( chart). - Asks Ss to read the statements and guess which is true , which is false . Statements Guess 1. It is safe to leave medicine around the house . 2. Drugs can look like candy . 3. A kitchen is a suitable place to play . 4. Playing with one match can not start a fife . 5. Putting a knife into an electrical socket is dangerous . 6. Young children do not understand that many house hold objects are dangerous . - Calls on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . III / While - reading : (15’) 1. Reading the text : - Turns on the tape , Ss look at poster to check their prediction. - Has them correct the statements which are false. 1. It is safe to keep medicine in locked cupboards .. Key F T F F T T.

(28) 3. A kitchen is dangerous place to play . 4. Playing with one match can cause fire. - Calls on some Ss to read the text aloud ( 2 Ss ) 2. Comprehension questions : - Asks Ss to work in pairs to find out the answers of these questions . - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . - Gives feedback . a. Because children often try to eat and drink them . b Because the kitchen is a dangerous place to place . c. Because playing with one match can cause fire . d. Because children often try to put something into electrical sockets and electricity can kill . e. Because the dangerous objects can injure or kill children . IV / Post - Reading : ( 9’) Discussion - Asks Ss to work in groups , discussing about the topic . 1. Safety precautions in the street . 2. Safety precautions at school . - Ss present in front of class. - T- Ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. V/ Consolidation: ( 5’) - T asks ss to remind the safety precautions in the home. - You must/have to.... + put all chemicals and drugs in locked cupboards. + not let children play in the kitchen. + not play with matches. +cover elitrical sockets. + keep all dangerous objects out of childrent’s reach: scissors,knives,.... VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Copy down the answers above . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 6 Period 18. Teaching date: September 23rd, 2011. Unit 3:AT HOME Parts of lesson : Write A / Aims and Objectives :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + write a description of a room in their house . + develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: folder , beneath , dish rack , lighting fixture . 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , charts. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I/ Check –up: ( 5’) - Ss go to the board write the safety precautions in the home and the new words. - T – ss get feedback. - T gives marks..

(29) II/ Pre - writing : (10’) Chatting ( Asking something about the room on page 32 ) 1. Which room is this ? 2. What is this ? / Where is it ? - Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss : - T helps ss to pronounce words. - T- Ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. - Asks Ss to read the description of Hoa’s room , then asks some comprehension questions . a. What is there on the left of the room ? b. Where is the bookshelf ? c. What is there on the right side of the room ? d. Where is the wardrobe ? - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Corrects and gives feedback : a. There is a desk on the left of the room . b. The bookshelf is above the desk . c. There is a window on the right side of the room . d. The wardrobe is beside the window and opposite the desk . - Callson some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa’s room aloud . III / While - writing : (20’) - Asks Ss to describe Hoa,s kitchen , using the given cues . - Asks Ss to share with their partners . - Calls on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class . - Corrects the mistakes from some descriptions if any . - Gives feedback . (chart) This is Hoa’s kitchen . There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room . Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and next to the sink is a towel rack . The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right of the window and beneath the selves . On the selves and on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea . In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table and four chairs . The lighting fixture is above the table , and directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers . - Calls on some Ss to read the completed descriptions aloud . VI / Post- writing : (9’) Speaking - AskS Ss to talk to their partners about their room / living room / kitchen . - CallS on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in front of class . V / Homework : (1’) 1. Write a description of their living room . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................................... Week 7 Period 19. Teaching date: September 26th, 2011 Unit 3:AT HOME Parts of lesson : Language focus.

(30) A/Aims and Objectives :By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to + use the Reflexive Pronouns to do the exercise. + use modal verbs. + and know how to use Why – Because. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: + use the Reflexive Pronouns to do the exercise. + use modal verbs. + and know how to use Why – Because C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Brainstorming - tidy up - do our homework Things you - cook can do - water flower - clean the floor - repair the machine - fix the TV set Things you - paint the house can not do - Calls on some Ss to talk with “ Can “ - Listens and corrects mistakes if any II / Language focus : 1. Activity 1: ( 14’) - Sets the scene “ You do your homework and no one helps you . What do you say ? “ I do my homework myself . -> Explains the reflexive Pronouns - > Form : We use I with myself You ......... yourself / yourselves He ...........himself She ..........herself We .........ourselves They ...... themselves It ............. itself - Emphasis pronouns : Used to emphasize a person or a thing . Eg : She cuts herself . John saw himself in the mirror .  Complete the dialogue : - Asks Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable reflexive pronouns or emphasis pronouns . - Calls on some pairs to practice speaking . - Gives feedback : a. himself b. ourselves c. myself / yourself d. himself / herself / themselves e. yourself . - Asks them to practice the complete dialogue . 2. Activity 2: (25’) - Sets the scene : “ Hoa is very sad because she failed her English test . What do you say to advise her ? “ “ You should study harder “  Another word for “ should “ : Ought to Ought to + Infinitive.

(31) - Ex 2 : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the pictures ( Language focus 2 ) - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Gives feedback : a. I failed my English test . You ought to study harder b. You ought to get up earlier . c. You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables . d. You ought to see a dentist . * Checking : Noughts and crosses : His tooth / ache The floor / dirty My English / bad. Hoa / late Bao / overweight Hergrades / bad. My room / untidy She / thin The washing machine / not work.  Using “ Should “ to play game . Ex 1 : Look at the pictures . Complete the dialogue , Use Must or Have to and the verbs in the box : - Asks Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue : - Calls on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class. - Gives feedback 1. must / have to tidy 2. have to / must dust 3. must / have to sweep 4. must / have to clean 5. have to / must empty 6. must / have to feed III / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Do exercise 4 ( language focus 4 ) 2. Copy all the exercises above . 3. Prepare the test . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 7 Period 20. Teaching date: September 27th, 2011. The forty-five minute test. A / Aims and Objectives : Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to do the test well . B / Teaching aids : Papers , chalks and boards . C / Content : ĐỀ A I.Pick out the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the other word (Hãy chỉ ra từ mà phần gạch chân đọc khác với những từ còn lại) .(0,5m) 1. a. orphanage b. joke c. owner d. gramophone 2. a. character b. attraction c. satellite d. veteran II.Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others. (Khoanh tròn vào câu có âm tiết nhấn khác với những từ còn lại)(0.5m) 1. a. generous b. reserved c. sociable d. curly.

(32) 2 a. annoy b. defeat c. perform d. gather III.Choose the best answer : (3ms)(Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất) 1.Only a few of the children were brave enough................come closer. a. for b. in order c. so d. to 2.Julian has long...............hair. a. full b. fair c. slim d. oval 3.We like Khanh Vy very much because she’s very...................... a. blond b. curly c. bold d. generous 4. Bell experimented...............ways of transmitting speech. a. at b. with c. on d. in 5. A plenty of young people have volunteered...............social activities. a. for b. about c. at d. in 6.Thomas Watson was Bell’s .......................... a. owner b. assistant c. inventor d. demonstrator 7.Our parents...................us some new clothes next month. a. buy b. to buy c. are going to buy d. bought 8.Mai couldn’t go to the park with her friend because she had to do her.............. a. message b. thing c. chore d. room 9.Your sister..................to get up early yesterday. a. didn’t have b. haven’t c. hadn’t d. don’t have 10.We enjoy......................with our friends in the morning a lot. a. swim b. is swiming c. swimming d. swims 11. Hoa : “Nice to meet you, Nam” Nam : “.........................................................” a. See you again. b. Nice to meet you, too. c. Come and meet. d. Yes, please. 12.Hoa cuts ............. a. herself b. myself c. yourself d. hisself IV.Read the passage: *Choose the best answer: (1m) In my kitchen, there is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room. Next to the refrigerator, there is a stove and an oven. On the other side of the oven, there is a sink with a faucet and next to the sink, there is a towel rack. A dish rack is on the counter, to the right of the window and beneath the shelves. On the shelves and on the counter beneath the window there are some jars of sugar, flour, tea, etc... In the middle of the kitchen there is a long table with six chairs. There is a lightning fixture above the table and beneath the lightning fixture is a vase with flowers. We often have warm meals together in this small kitchen. TRUE FALSE 1.There are some fridges in my kitchen. …….. ……… 2.The lightning fixture is above the vase with flowers. …….. ……… 3.There are some jars on the dish rack. …….. ……… 4.We often eat together in this kitchen. …….. ……… * Answer the questions(1,5ms) 1. What is there next to the fridge? ............................................................................................................................................................ 2. Where are the jars of sugar ? ............................................................................................................................................................ 3. Is there a table with six chairs in the middle of the kitchen? ............................................................................................................................................................ V.Writing: *Sentences transformation: (2ms) 1.They are intelligent. They can speak four languages. They are..........................................................................................................................(enough).

(33) 2. Hoa is too young to get married. Hoa isn’t......................................................................................................................... (enough) 3.I advise you to keep your house clean and tidy. You ought........................................................................................................................(ought to) 4. It isn’t necessary for you to wake up so early. You don’t.........................................................................................................................(have to) *Make sentences from the given words: ( 0,5m) 5.I / be / strong / enough/ lift / the box. ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.Barbara /not /go/school / last week. ........................................................................................................................................................ VI.Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 1m ) Thanh cong delivery service Date :..............................................................(1) Time : .............................................................(2) For : Mrs .Van Message : Mr Nam called about his stationery order.He wanted you to call him at .....................(3) Taken by : ............................................................(4) 1.a. May 11 2 a.eleven o’clock 3.a. 884 845 4.Mr . Vinh. b.May 12 b.twelve o’clock b.884 684 b.Mr.Minh. c.May 13 c.thirteen o’clock c.848 864 c.Mr.Nam. d.May 14 d.fourteen o’clock d.884 846 d.Mr. Hoang. ***GOOD LUCK*** ĐỀ B I.Pick out the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the other word (Hãy chỉ ra từ mà phần gạch chân đọc khác với những từ còn lại) .(0,5m) 1. a. device b. exhibition c. assistant d. scissors 2. a. stationary b. emirgration c. arrangement d. message II.Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others. (Khoanh tròn vào câu có âm tiết nhấn khác với những từ còn lại)(0.5m) 1. a. countless b. generous c. mobile d. commercial 2 a. agree b. conduct c. gather d. transmit III.Choose the best answer : (3ms)(Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất) 1. Hoa : “Nice to meet you, Nam” Nam : “.........................................................” a. See you again b. Come and meet c. Nice to meet you, too d. Yes, please 2.Nhan likes Mai Nhi very much because she’s very...................... a. blond b. curly c. reserved d. bold 3.Lan couldn’t go to the movies with her friend because she had to do her.............. a. message b. house c. room d. chore 4. She looks.............herself in the mirror. a. at b. with c. on d. in 5.He cuts................. a. myself b. yourself c. herself d. himself 6.That boy is old enough ..............go to school by himself. a. so b. to c. for d. in order 7.Thomas Watson was Bell’s ...........................

(34) a. inventor b. owner c. demonstrator d. assistant 8.Hai’s father ...............him a new bike yesterday. a. give b. gave c. to give d. will give 9.A plenty of young people have volunteered...............social activities. a. at b. about c. in d. for 10.Hue has short...............hair. a. full b. curly c. fat d. oval 11.Our parents...................us some new clothes next week. a. to buy b. buy c. bought d. are going to buy 12.We like......................swimming with our friends in the morning a lot. a. go b. is going c. going d. goes IV.Read the passage: *Choose the best answer: (1m) In my kitchen, there is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room. Next to the refrigerator, there is a stove and an oven. On the other side of the oven, there is a sink with a faucet and next to the sink, there is a towel rack. A dish rack is on the counter, to the right of the window and beneath the shelves. On the shelves and on the counter beneath the window there are some jars of sugar, flour, tea, etc... In the middle of the kitchen there is a long table with six chairs. There is a lightning fixture above the table and beneath the lightning fixture is a vase with flowers. We often have warm meals together in this small kitchen. TRUE …….. …….. …….. ……... FALSE ……… ……… ……… ………. 1.There are some fridges in my kitchen. 2.The lightning fixture is above the vase with flowers. 3.There are some jars on the dish rack. 4.We often eat together in this kitchen. * Answer the questions(1,5ms) 1. What is there next to the fridge? ............................................................................................................................................................ 2. Where are the jars of sugar ? ............................................................................................................................................................ 3. Is there a table with six chairs in the middle of the kitchen? ............................................................................................................................................................ V.Writing: *Sentences transformation: (2ms) 1. It isn’t necessary for you to wake up so early. You don’t........................................................................................................................(have to) 2. I advive you to keep your house clean and tidy. You ought.......................................................................................................................(ought to) 3. Nha Vy is too young to get married. Nha Vy isn’t...................................................................................................................(enough) 4. They are intelligent. They can speak four languages. They are..........................................................................................................................( enough) *Make sentences from the given words: ( 0,5m) 5.She / be / strong / enough/ lift / the box. ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.Thanh /not /go/ art club / last week. ....................................................................................................................................................... VI.Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 1m ).

(35) Thanh cong delivery service Date :..............................................................(1) Time : .............................................................(2) For : Mrs .Van Message : Mr Nam called about his stationery order.He wanted you to call him at .....................(3) Taken by : ............................................................(4) 1.a. May 11 2.a.eleven o’clock 3.a.884 845 4.Mr . Vinh. b.May 12 b.twelve o’clock b.884 684 b.Mr.Minh. c.May 13 c.thirteen o’clock c.848 864 c.Mr.Nam. d.May 14 d.fourteen o’clock d.884 846 d.Mr. Hoang. ***GOOD LUCK***. Nhận biết TN TL. Chủ đề I.Phonetics + Vowel sound + stressed. Thông hiểu TN TL. Vân dụng TN TL. 4. 12 II.Lexico and grammar + Language functions + Reflexive pronouns + verb- preposition + Modal verbs + Adj enough to V bare + past simple tense + Future with be going to III. Reading 4 + A text about a description of the kitchen IV. Writing + + Modal verbs + Adj enough to V bare + Simple past V. Listening +Unit 3: At home 20 Tổng. Tổng 4. 1. 1 12. 3. 3. 3. 7. 1. 1,5. 2,5 6. 6 2,5 4. 2,5 4. 1. 1. 7 5. 6 2,5. ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề KI ỂM TRA 1 TI ẾT LỚP 8(L ẦN I –HKI) ĐỀA. 29 2,5. 10.

(36) I . Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the other word (0,25mx2) 1.a 2.d II. Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others.( .(0,25mx2) 1.b 2.d III.Choose the best answer :(0,25mx12) 1.d 2. b 3.d 4.b 5.a 6.b 7.c 8.c 9. a 10.c 11.b 12.a IV.Read the passage : *True/False/ No Information: (0,25mx4)1.F 2.T 3.F 4.T * Answer the questions(0,5m x 3) 1. Next to the refrigerator, there is a stove and an oven. 2. On the shelves and on the counter beneath the window there are some jars of sugar. 3. Yes, there is. V.Writing: *Sentences transformation: (0,5m x 4) 1.They are intelligent enough to speak four languages. 2. Hoa isn’t old enough to get married. 3. You ought to keep your house clean and tidy. 4.You don’t have to wake up so early. *Make sentences from the given words: ( 0,25mx2) 5.I am strong enough to lift the box. 6.Barbara didn’t go to school last week. VI.Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 0,25m x 4 ) 1.a 2b 3d 4d + Tape script : A customer telephoned the Thanh Cong Delivery Service on May 11 just twelve o ,clock . The customer,s name was Mr Nam , and he wanted to speak to Mrs Van . Mrs Van was in a meeting and could not come to the phone . So Mr.Hoang took a message . Mr Nam called about his stationery order . He said Mrs Van could reach him at 884 846. ĐỀB I . Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the other word (0,25mx2) 1.a 2.d II. Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others.( .(0,25mx2) 1.d 2.c III.Choose the best answer :(0,25mx12) 1.c 2.c 3.d 4.a 5.d 6.b 7.d 8.b 9.d 10.b 11.d 12.c IV.Read the passage : *True/False/ No Information: (0,25mx4) 1.F 2.T 3.F 4.T * Answer the questions(0,5m x 3) 1. Next to the refrigerator, there is a stove and an oven. 2. On the shelves and on the counter beneath the window there are some jars of sugar. 3. Yes, there is. V.Writing: *Sentences transformation: (0,5m x 4) 1. You don’t have to wake up so early. 2. You ought to keep your house clean and tidy. 3. Nha Vy isn’t old to get married. 4. They are intelligent enough to speak four languages. *Make sentences from the given words: ( 0,25mx2) 5.She is strong enough to lift the box. 6.Thanh didn’t go to the his art club last week. VI.Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 0,25m x 4 ).

(37) 1.a 2b 3d 4d + Tape script : A customer telephoned the Thanh Cong Delivery Service on May 11 just twelve o ,clock . The customer,s name was Mr Nam , and he wanted to speak to Mrs Van . Mrs Van was in a meeting and could not come to the phone . So Mr.Hoang took a message . Mr Nam called about his stationery order . He said Mrs Van could reach him at 884 846. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 7 Period 21. Teaching date: September 30th, 2011. Unit 4:OUR PAST Parts of lesson : Getting started +Listen and read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + talk about past events . + know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: - to look after = to take care of , Equipment, a folk tale, Traditional, a great grandma ( 2.Grammar: +Past simple tense + Used to C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette, tape, picture, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : ( 5’) Getting started ( Hang on the picture) - Asks Ss to look at the picture and write the names of the things that do not belong to the past . * Answers : - The TV - The radio - The mobile - The light fixture - Modern clothing / school uniforms -T- ss get feedback. II / Presentation : ( 10’) - T sets the scene: Nga’s grandma is talking about the past to Nga . Now we find what did Nga’s grandma often did in the past. - Ss give the things that Nga’s grandma often did in the past. + used to live on the farm. + had to stay home. + used to look after her younger brothers and sisters. + etc, ....... - From Ss’ amswer,T presents some newwords. - SS pronounce words - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. - T helps ss to know more the usage and form of Simple past tense/ used to. + S+ v(past) + S + did not + V (bare) + Did + S + V(bare) ...? -Adverbs often use in the simple past tense: yesterday , last + time( week ,day ,year,month,..),etc......

(38) + Used to + V(bare) * Checking : What and where III / Practice : (20’) - Turns on the tape 2 times . - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. -T get feedback. - T asks ss to look at their books to read the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma to check their predictions - Asks them to correct the false statements . 1. Grandma used to love on farm 3. She had a hard life . 5. It is an old folk tale . - T –ss get feedback. * Comprehension : - Gets Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering questions - T-ss give feedback a. She used to live on a farm . b. Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom to look after her younger brothers and sisters . c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house and wash the clothes . d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great father used to tell stories . e. She asked her grandma to tell her the tale “ The lost shoe “ - Asks Ss to practice asking and answering the questions . * Fact or opinion - Has Ss read the statements part 3 and decide which is a fact and which is a pinion . Statements a. I used to live on a farm . b. There was not any electricity . c. Mom had to do everything without the help of modern equipment . d. My father used to tell us stories e. The best one was the lost shoe . f. Traditional stories are great . - T- Ss give feedback IV / Production : (9’). Fact X X X. Opinion. X X X. Survey. Did you use to ................? Name - Get up late . - Ride bicycle too fast . - Go to school . - Eat too much candy . - Forget to do your homework - Gives feedback by asking Ss some questions to check “ Who used to get up late / ride bicycle too fast ...?” - Ss answer. V / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Write the result of their survey . 2. Learn by heart new words . 3. Prepare the next lesson Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………..

(39) ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 8 Period 22. Teaching date: October 3rd, 2011 Unit 4:OUR PAST Parts of lesson : Speak. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + use USED TO to talk about the things people used to do in the past . + develope ss speaking skill. + use USED TO to talk about the things they used to do. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: + Used to C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, pictures, charts . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check-up : (5’) - Ss go to the board and write the words that they’ve learnt last period. - Ss answer the queastion a and d in exercise 2. - T gets feedback and give marks. II / Pre - speaking : ( 10’)  Recalls the conversation between Nga and her grandma, then asks “ Where did Nga ,s grandma always live ? “ -> She always lived on a farm . - Asks : “ Another word for always lived “ . - Asks Ss to use Used to to make question and answer. Ex : “ Where did Nga ,s grandma use to live ? “ She used to live on a farm .  Form : S + Used to + inf S + did not use to + inf Did + S + use to + inf ?  Expressing a past habit , or an action usually happened in the past .  Practice Word cue drill (chart) a. Live / Hue / Kbang b. Have / long hairs / short hairs c. Get up / late / early d. Walk to school / bicycle e. Study / evening / early morning - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the cues above . Ex: Where did you use to live? I used to live in Hue last year.Now,I live in Kbang. III / While - speaking : (20’) ( use the pictures) - Gets Ss to work in closed pairs , then open pairs . - Asks them to compare 2 pictures , using “ USED TO “ to talk about the actions in the past , using these ideas below : 1. Where did they live in the past ? And now ? 2. How did they travel ? 3. What is about the electricity ? 4. What is about their life / work ? 5. Did children use to go to school ?.

(40) 6. What is about their entertainment ? - Calls on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback . * Suggested answers : 1. People used to live in small houses . Now they live in big houses and buildings. 2. People used to walk . Now they can go by cars or motorbikes . 3. Now , there is electricity everywhere . 4. People used to work hard all the time . Now they have a lot of time for entertainment . 5. Most children used to stay at home . Now , they all go to school . 6. Children used to play traditional games such as hide and seek , skip rope ... outdoors . Now , they have a lot of modern games – video games . IV/ Post - speaking : (9’) Write it up - Asks Them to write a complete writing about the difference of the life in the past and now. - Calls on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class . - Corrects common mistakes . V / Homework : (1’) 1. Write about the things you used to do last year . Beginning : Last year , I used to get up late . Now , I get up very early and do morning exercises . ... ... “ 2.Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 8 Period 23. Teaching date: October 4th, 2011 Unit 4:OUR PAST Parts of lesson : Listen + Correcting test. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + understand the main idea of a story by listening . + develop ss listening skill. + review ss knowledge by correcting the test. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: - Foolish, greedy, Gold, amazement, discover, excitedly. - to lay -> laid – laid 2.Grammar: Simple past tense C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, cassette , chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Check-up : (5’) - Ss go to the board and make sentences with “Used to...” - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : ( 5’) Pelmanism run ran fly flew ride rode eat ate sit sat come came - Continue until all the cards are finished . III/ Pre - listening : (7’) - Introduces the topic of the listening task : “ Listen to the story and choose the most suitable moral lesson / the most suitable topic of the story”. - Has ss listen to the tape at the first time..

(41) - T helps ss to know some new words. - SS pronounce words( chorus /individual). - Asks Ss to predict the moral lesson of the story . - Has them look at four titles and guess which is the most suitable to the story . - Calls on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . IV / While - listening : ( 7’) - Turns on the tape twice and asks them to check their predictions . - Calls on some Ss to read their results and give feed back : “ Don,t be foolish and greedy “ - Turns on the tape once more to check their results again . - Asks Ss what tense is used in the story ( Simple past tense ) - Has Ss listen again and try to write as many verbs as possible . The student who writes more verbs get good marks . - Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud . - Give feedback: went / discovered / laid / shouted / finished / could not / were / ran / looked / wanted / decided . - Asks Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs. V / Post - listening : ( 5’) Mapped dialogue ( chart) Lan : ............................lunch ? Nga : No . I ate noodles . Lan : How ................... school ? Nga : I rode a bicycle to school . Lan : Which subject did you have yesterday ? Nga : .................. math . Lan : .................................................? Nga : I was at home . - Asks them to work in pairs to practice the dialogue . - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Corrects and gives feedback . VI.Correcting the test: ( 15’) - Ss deliver the test to ss. - T gets out some mistakes that ss got in the test. + Adj + enough + to V + Past simple tense + modal verbs + Vbare - T retells some structures using in the test. - T asks ss to do the exercise .  Complete the sentence with the verbs given . 1. I’m not old enough.......to drive........(drive) a car. 2. She is tall enough ......to reach..........(reach) the lighting fixture. 3. Nam has to .......do...........( do) his homework fisself. 4. We have to ......clean..............(clean) our room. 5. Nga.......gave.............(give) me a gift yeasterday. 6. Hang and Nga didn’t ....... come........(come) to tha class last night. VII / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Copy the completed dialogue in their notebooks . 2. Do exercises ........ in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 8. Teaching date: October 7th, 2011.

(42) Period 24 Unit 4:OUR PAST Parts of lesson : Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + understand and retell the story - The lost shoe. + develop ss reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: cruel, upset, fairy, rag, immediately, broken heart, change... into. - to fall in love with - magical (a) -> magically( adv), 2.Grammar: Simple past tense C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’)Brainstorming Name some folk tales that you have read .  Possible answers : - Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section bamboo ) - Tấm Cám - Hoàng tử cóc ( The frog Prince ) - Bạch Tuyết và bảy chú lùn ( Snow white and 7 dwarfs ). The folktales. II / Pre - reading : ( 10’) - Introduces the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss . 1.Do you know this story? Can you guess from the title? 2.Read and find out who Little Pea was, who Stout Nut was and whose shoes were lost. - From ss’ answers, T presents some new words. - T helps ss to pronounce words. - T – Ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. * T / F statements predictions - Asks Ss to work in groups to predict Statements Guess , 1. Little Pea s father is poor farmer 2. Her father got married again after his wife died . 3. Her new mother was beautiful and nice to her . 4. She worked hard all day . 5. She did not have new clothes to take part in the festival . - Calls on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board III / While - reading : (20’) 1. Checking the predictions : - T asks SS to read the text ,then check their predictions and correct the false ones . - Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to her . - Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful clothes. - Calls on 2 Ss to read the sentence. Key T T F T F.

(43) - Corrects mistakes if any . 2. Comprehension questions - Asks Ss to work in pairs answering the questions - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering . - T –ss give feedback . a. She was a poor farmer ,s daughter . b. She made her do the chores all day . c. Before the festival started , a fairy appeared and magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes . d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe fitted her . e. Ss answer themselves . - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class. 3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with words from the story . - Asks Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks with suitable words from the story . - Calls on some Ss to read their complete sentences aloud . - Gives feedback a. farmer b. died c. used d. marry / choose e. clothes f. lost IV / Post - reading : ( 9’)  Retell the story - Let Ss work in pairs , telling the story again in details ( They can look at the statements in the gap filling exercise and add more ) - Calls on some Ss to retell the story in front of class . - Corrects mistakes if any V / Homework : ( 1’) 1.Summarize the story . 2. Do exercises in workbook Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 9 (Dạy bù vào sáng thứ 2 cho phù hợp với PPCT mới). Teaching date: October 10th, 2011. Unit 4:OUR PAST Parts of lesson : Write A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + use Simple Past Tense to write a folk tale . + develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : wisdom, stripe, straw, servant, graze, escape, light. 2.Grammar: Simple past tense C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, , chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : (5’) - Ss read the text in part “ Read”,write the newwords. - T gets feedback and give marks. II / Pre - writing : ( 10’) Asks Ss some questions about imaginary stories.

(44) 1. Do you want to read imaginary stories ? 2. Name some of them 3. Which story do you like best ? 4. Have you ever read the story “ How the tigers got his stripes ?” - Ss answer. - From ss’ answer,T ntroduces the aims of the writing . * Matching A B 1. wisdom a. trốn thoát 2. a stripe b. vằn, sọc 3. a straw c. gặm cỏ 4. a servant d. Trí khôn 5. graze e. rơm rạ 6. escape f .người hầu , đầy tớ - Asks Ss to come to the board to match items on the left with those on the right by drawing a line connecting the story . - From the “ matching”, T presents some words. - Ss pronounce words. - T –ss feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. * Reading : - Asks Ss to read and complete the story . - Calls on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs in the box . - Asks them work in pairs , using suitable verbs to fill in the blanks . - Calls on them to read their answers aloud . - Give feedback 1. appear 2. as 3. said 4. left 5. went 6. lit 7. burned 8. escaped + Comprehension questions : ( chart) 1. Where was the man ? 2. What did the buffalo do when the tiger appeared ? 3. What did the tiger want to know ? 4. What did he do before going home ? Why ? 5. What did he do when he returned ? - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions above . III / While - writing : ( 20’) - Gets Ss to do exercise 2 . ( Ss have to imagine to be a man in order to write the story ) + Notice : Change The man -> I / His -> My - Ask sSs to work individually , then share with their partners and correct mistakes . - Takes some writings to correct in front of the class. - Give suggested answers : One day, as I was in the field and my buffalo was grazing nearby,a tiger came.It asked why the strong buffalo was my servant and why I was its master.I told the tiger that I had something called wisdom.The tiger wanted to see it, but I told it I left the wisdom at home. Then I tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because I didn’t want it to eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw that I said was my wisdom and I burned the tiger. The tiger escaped, but today it still has black stripes from the burns. IV / Post - writing : (8’) Telling the story - Divides the class into 2 teams . Team A plays the role of the tiger . Team B plays the role of the buffalo - Asks them to work in team , telling the story Notice : - Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I.

(45) - Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - > I VI.Consolidation : (1’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. V / Homework : (1’) 1. Write the story again , imagine you are : * The tiger * The buffalo 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: October 10th, 2011. Week 9 Period 25. Unit 4:OUR PAST Parts of lesson : Language focus A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use prepositions of time and Used to ( to talk about the action which always happens in the past ) and further practice in the Past Simple Tense. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: + Simple past tense + Used to + Vbare + Prepositions of time C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, , chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : (5’) - Ss complete the sentences from the cues. 1. Ha / used / live / small apartment. Ha used to live in a small apartment. 2. We / play / guitar / 2 weeks ago . We played the guitar 2 weeks ago. - T feedbacks and gives marks. II / Practice : 1.Activity 1: Ex1,2( 10’) - Ss go to the board and write the past simple form of each verb. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistake if needed. b.flied c.took d.went e.had f.did g. was/were h. rode i. ate j. sat k.came - T ask ss to work in pair to complete the dialogue. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistake if needed. a.Did you eat rice for lunch? b.I rode a bike to school. c.Where were you yesterday? d.I had Math. 2. Activity 2-Ex 3 / page 44 : ( chart)(10’) A. B. Key.

(46) 1. In 2. On 3.At 4. Between 5. After / Before. a. January b. 3 p m c. Wednesday d. November 1997 e. July 2nd f. 7 a m and 9 am. 1.a / d 2. c / e 3. b / f 4. f 5. b. - Calls on some Ss to read aloud each phrase . - Explains the uses of some prepositions of time and ask Ss to do Exercises - Asks Ss to work individually , then compare with their partners . - Calls on some Ss to read their complete sentences aloud . - Gives feedback a. on b. in c. between d. at / after e. before 3.Activity 3-. Complete the dialogue : (10’) - Has Ss work in pairs , looking at 4 verbs , using USED TO with the verbs “ Live – Stay – Have – be “ to complete the dialogue between Nga and Hoa . - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback . 0. used to stay 1. used to have 2. used to be 3. used to live III / Further practice : ( 9’) Deliberate mistakes - Read aloud some sentences and ask Ss to listen carefully and try to find out the mistake . When they hear a mistake , they stand up and say No then correct it . Eg : T : I usually stay at home in Sunday Ss : No , on Sunday , not in Sunday . a. My father used to play football when he has spare time .( had) b. She used live in Ha noi .( She used to live in Hanoi.) c. My parents will arrive in 3 o’clock .( at) d. He was born in June the third . ( on) e.My mother was born on February 1952.( in) IV / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Do exercises (1,2) in textbook . 2. Do the exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 9 Period 26. Teaching date: October 11th, 2011 Unit 5: STUDY HABITS Parts of lesson : Getting started + listen and read. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + understand the dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study . + know some new words..

(47) B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : report card, improve, pronunciation. - to be proud of / to try one,s best 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, , chart, cassette, picture. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : (5’) - Ss go to the board and make 2 sentences with “ used to” - T feedbacks and gives marks. II / Warm up : ( 5’) Net work (getting started) - Asks Ss to write as many subjects as they can on the board .. Subjects at school.  Possible answers : Chemistry / Physics / maths / geography / literature / history . * Chatting + How often do you have English / Math / Literature? We have English / Math / Literature 3 times a week. + What subjects are you good at ? / bad at ? + What subject do you like best ? / Why ? III / Pre - reading : ( 10’) - T hangs on the picture and asks ss some questions. - How many people are there in the picture?Who is Tim? - Is Tim a good student? - What were Tim and his mother talking about? - Ss answer. - From ss’ answer , T leads into new lesson and presents some words. - Ss pronounce words. - T –ss feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. * Checking : Rub out and remember *. T / F statements predictions - Asks Ss to read the statements and predict they are true or false . Statements Guess Key 1. Tim was out when his mother called him . F 2. Tim,s mother met his teacher at school . F , 3. Tim s report is poor . F 4. Tim needs to improve his Spanish grammar T 5. Tim promised to try his best in learning Spanish . T - Calls on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . IV/ While - reading : (15’).

(48) - Turns on the tape and asks Ss to look at their books , then read the dialogue to check their predictions . - Calls on some Ss to read their results . - Gives feedback : - Asks Ss to correct false statements . 1. Tim was in the living room / at home 2. his report is excellent 3. He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation . - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class . - Listens and corrects their pronunciation if any . * Comprehension questions : - Asks Ss to work in pairs , answering the questions . - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . - T –ss give feedback . a. She is Tim,s teacher . b. She gave Tim,s mother his report card . c. He worked really hard . d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation . e. She gave him a dictionary - Asks them to practice in open pairs . V / Post - reading : (8’) Survey - Asks Ss to work in groups by standing to ask each other the question “ What subject do you need to improve ? “ and they have to write the names and the subjects that their friends answer : Name What subject Lan History …………. ……….. - Asks Ss who need to improve the same subjects work in group and discuss how to improve . - T feedbacks. VI.Consolidation : (1’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. VII / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Write the way how to improve the subject that they are not good at . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 9 Period 27. Teaching date: October 14th, 2011. Unit 5: STUDY HABITS Parts of lesson : Speak A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - talk about their study habits . - develop ss’ speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : (5’).

(49) - Ss write the new words: thói quen học tập,cách phát âm,tự hào,hành vi,tiếng Tây ban nha. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (5’) Brainstorming -T asks Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard .. How to improve your English .. * Possible answers : - Speak English to friends in class - Watch English TV - Do grammar exercises - Read English stories - Read English newspapers / magazines - Listen to the English radio program II / Pre - speaking : (10’) - Introduce the topic of the speaking : Ask and naswer about our study.. - Call on some Ss to read the possible answers above and copy down . - Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes. III / While – speaking : (15’) * Model : Lan said she did her homework after dinner He / she said ……… - Call on some pairs to read the model - Ask Ss to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class. - Correct mistakes if any . IV / Post - speaking : (8’) - Ask Ss to write with information above . Eg : Lan ,s elder brother helps him with his homework . - Call on some Ss to read their writings . VI.Consolidation : (1’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. V / Homework : (1’) 1. Copy the effective ways of learning English they have found out . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 10 Period 28. Teaching date: October 17th, 2011.

(50) Unit 5: STUDY HABITS Parts of lesson : Listen A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - listen for specific information to fill in a report card . - develop ss listening skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : - behavior (n) - A participant (n) - Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (a) - cooperation (n) - attendance (n) 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks,cassette,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,paiwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : (5’) - Asks Ss to retell “ How to improve your English” - Feedbacks and gives marks. II / Pre - listening (10’) - Introduces the topic of the listening and some new words : - behavior (n) - A participant (n) - Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (a) - cooperation (n) - attendance (n) * Checking : What and where - Asks Ss to look at Nga,s report and predict the missing information and then compare with their partners . a. day present (1) b. Day absent (2) c. Behavior – participant (3) d. Listening (4) e. Speaking (5) f. Reading (6) g. Writing (7) - Calls on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . III / While - listening : (15’) 1. Listen : - Gets Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Calls on Ss to read their results and give feedback . 1. 87 days present 2. 5 days absent 3. participation : Spanish pronunciation 4. Listening : Comprehension 5. Speaking : A 6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B 2. Comprehension questions : - Asks Ss to answer some questions about Nga,s report card . 1. Who are Nga,s parents ? 2. What is Nga,s teacher,s name ? 3. What subject was reported ? For what term ?.

(51) 4. What are the comments ? 5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B CD ? - Asks Ss to listen to the tape again and work in pairs to answer the questions . - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Gives feedback . IV / Post - listening (10’) Survey( chart) Questions. You. Your partner. 1. When do you do your homework ? 2. Who helps you with your homework ? 3. How much time do you spend on Maths / English / History / Literature ? 4. Which subject do you need to improve ? 5. What do you do to improve your English? - Asks Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners questions and taking notes of the answers . - Asks Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report what they have known about their partners, study . - Corrects mistakes if any . V.Consolidation: (4’) - Asks ss to retell the content of this report card. VI / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Write something about your partners, study habits . Eg : Lan is my best friend . She works very hard and always get good grades . she usually does her homework after school Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 10 Period 29. Teaching date: October 18th, 2011. Unit 5: STUDY HABITS Parts of lesson : READ (Language learners...........anytime) A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know how to learn vocabularies. - understand the text and get specific information . - develop ss reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : Mother tongue, make a list, learn by heart, to stick. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : ( 5’) Chatting 1. Do you like English ? 2. How many new words do you try to learn a day ? - Ss answer -T- ss get feedback.

(52) II / Pre - reading : ( 10’) - Introduces the topic of the reading passage and some new words . “Today we will find the ways to learn vocabularies” *Brainstorming - Asks Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the ways how a language learner can learn new words .. Ways language learners learn new words. * Possible answers : - Learn by heart - Translate it into mother tongue - Write each word on one piece of paper and put it into the pocket to learn whenever - Learn through example sentences - Write it on small piece of paper and stick everywhere in the house ……. - T- ss get feedback. *. Pre- teach vocabulary : - Mother tongue ( example ) - make a list( example ) - learn by heart( example ) - to stick ( mime ) - Ss pronounce words, T get feedback. * Checking : Slap the board III / While - reading : ( 15’) 1. True / False statements - Asks Ss to read the statements (sentence a, b only, then read the text and decide which is true and which is false . ( Page 50 ) - Calls on Ss to read their answers and give feedback a. F b. T * Reading : - Calls on 2 or 3 Ss to read the passage aloud . 2. Comprehension questions - Lets Ss work in pairs to answer the questions - Calls on some Pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - Gives feedback a. No. They learn words in different ways . b. Because they help them to remember the use of new words . c. They write examples, put the words and their meanings on stickers , underline or highlight them . IV / Post - reading : (10’)  Survey : (chart) - Asks Ss to work in groups to interview one another and tick the ways they have used to learn new words Ways of learning words Lan Hoa ... 1. Make a list of words, their meanings and learn them by heart . 2. Write sample sentences with new words..

(53) 3. Stick new words somewhere in the house . 4. Underline or highlight the words . 5. Read stories in English . 6. Learn words through songs . - Calls on Ss to report about their groups . Ex : Lan learns words by making a list of words …. V.Consolidation : (4’) - Asks ss to retell the different way to learn the new words. VI / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you . 2. Prepare the next lesson Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 10 Period 30. Teaching date: October 21st, 2011 Unit 5: STUDY HABITS Parts of lesson : READ(cont) (Many language learners..........How should I learn words?). A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know how to learn vocabularies. - understand the text and get specific information . - develop ss reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : come across, underline, highlight, revision, revise. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’) - Ss write somes words on the board and pronounce them. -T gets feedback and give marks. II / Pre - reading : ( 10’) - T asks ss to retell some ways to study words. - Ss answer. - T gets feedback and lead into new lesson. - Introduces the topic of the reading passage and some new words . “Today we will find the other ways to learn vocabularies” *. Pre- teach vocabulary : + come(v) across ( example) + underline(v) ( example) + highlight(v) ( example) + revision(n) (mime) + revise(v) (mime) - Ss pronounce words, T get feedback. * Checking : Slap the board III / While - reading : ( 15’) * Reading :.

(54) - T reads the passage once. - Calls on 2 or 3 Ss to read the passage aloud . 1. True / False statements - Asks Ss to read the statements (sentence a, b only, then read the text and decide which is true and which is false . ( Page 50 ) - Calls on Ss to read their answers and give feedback c. F d. T 2. Comprehension questions - Lets Ss work in pairs to answer the questions . - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions. - Gives feedback d. Some learners learn all the new words they come across because they want to remember important words. e. Revision is necessary in learning words. f. I should try different ways of learning words and find out the best one. IV / Post - reading : (10’) - T asks ss to make a list of learning words in groups. - Ss write the answer on board. - T – ss get feedback. + make a list and put into it the meanings of new words in their mother tongue. + write one or two example sentence with each new words to remember how to use the word in the right way. + write each words and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere. + underline or highlight the words they want to learn. + revise the words the next day. V.Consolidation : (4’) - Asks ss to retell the different way to learn the new words. VI / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you . 2. Prepare the next lesson Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 11 Period 31. Teaching date: October 24th, 2011 Unit 5: STUDY HABITS Parts of lesson : Write. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know the format of a friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend . - develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : - Lunar New Year Festival , Enjoyable, to celebrate, celebration. 2.Grammar: - Simple present tense - Simple past tense C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’).

(55) - T asks ss to write the new words on board.( Mother tongue, to underline, to highlight, to come across , to stick) - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Pre - writing : ( 10’) Chatting 1. Have you ever written to someone ? 2. To whom do you usually write ? 3. What do you often write about ? - Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss . 1. Pre – teach vocabulary : - Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation ) - Enjoyable (adj ) ( example) - to celebrate ( v) ( example) -> celebration (n) ( example) * Checking : Rub out and remember 2. Ordering - Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct order . a. Opening d. Body of the letter b. Closing e. Signature c. The date f . Writer,s address . - Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e - Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order . 3. Labeling - Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter . 4 . Comprehension questions - Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ? b. What are there in the heading ? c. What is the main part of the letter ? d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ? e. What subject is Hoa good at ? f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New Year Festival ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of class . III / While - writing : ( 15’) - Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using the given information . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class . * Suggested letter : (chart) 15 Quang Trung street Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 Dear Donna Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you had an interesting Mother,s Day . We have received our second semester report last month . I got good grades for Geography , Physics and Math but my English and History results were poor . My teacher advises me to improve English and History . I think I have to study harder next school year . In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon festival in Vietnam . This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going to stay ther with them until the festival comes . I will send you a postcard from there . Write soon and tell me all your news . Best Lan , IV / Post - writing : ( 12’) Correction.

(56) - Calls on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct the mistakes . V.Consolidation : (2’) - Asks ss to retell the parts of a letter. VI / Homework : ( 1’) - Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her about your second semester report and about Summer holiday . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 11 Period 32. Teaching date: October 25th, 2011 Unit 5: STUDY HABITS Parts of lesson : Language focus. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use adverbs of manner and modal Should as an advice , reported speech with commands , requests and advice . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: - adverbs of manner and modal Should as an advice - reported speech with commands , requests and advice . C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’) - T collects the letters ss write at home ,gets feedback and marks. II / Warm up : (5’) Pelmanism good warm bad fast badly rode eat ate sit sat - Explains the meanings and uses of them + Hard (a) and hard ( adv ) have different meanings III / Presentation 1. Adverbs of manner .( 7’) - Setting the scene “ Use any word from the game Pelmanism to complete the following sentences “ * Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun or : S + be + Adjective S + V + adverb * Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the subject Adv modifies the verb of the sentence . Exercise 1 / 52 : Complete the dialogues - Ask Ss to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback . 1. hard 2. fast 3. badly 4. softly - Ask ss to practice the dialogue in open pairs . 2.Commands , requests in reported speech (15’) - Explain the form of the reported speech : * Form : To ask / tell + someone + to do something + Example :.

(57) a. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary ? “ => Mr Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary b. “ Please give Tim this dictionary . “ => Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary Exercise 3 / 53 : Explain the situation to Ss - Have Ss work in pairs to do exercise . - Call on some pairs to read their answers aloud , then go to the board to write them on . - Give feedback a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait for her outside her office . b. Miss Jackson told me to give you your report card for this semester . c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you with your Spanish pronunciation . d. Miss Jackson told me to meet her next week . - Call on some Ss to practice is pairs and correct their pronunciations . 3. Advice in reported speech (12’) - Explain the form of it * Form : S + said ( that ) + S + should + V ... Example : Miss Jackson said , “ Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation . “ => Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronunciation . Exercise 4 / 53 - Ask Ss to work with their partners . - Call on some Ss to practice in pairs and correct pronunciation . - Give feedback a. Miss Jackson said you should spend more time on Spanish pronunciation . b. Miss Jackson said you should practice speaking Spanish every day . c . Miss Jackson said you should listen to Spanish conversation on TV . d. Miss Jackson you should practice reading aloud passage in Spanish . e. Miss Jackson said you should use this dictionary to find out how to pronounce Spanish words . IV / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Review command , requests and advice in Reported Speech . 2. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks. 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB I. Objective : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be helped + to talk about the future . + to ask for favors and assistance. + to write a letter telling about the future plan II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassettte. III. Procedure :. Lesson 1 Lesson 2. Getting started Listen and read Speak. Reading for details and practice in gerunds use after the verbs : love , like , hate Practice asking for favors and responding to favors.

(58) Lesson 3 Lesson 4 Lesson 5 Lesson 6 Week 11 Period 33. Listen Read Write Langua focus 3. to listen for details Reading for details about the Ho Chi Minh communist youth organization. Writing a letter about the future plan. Further practice in simple present tense with future meaning Teaching date: October 28th, 2011. Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Parts of lesson : Getting started + Listen and Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - understand the dialogue about the young pioneers . - know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : enroll, application form, hobby, acting (n) 2.Grammar: gerunds. C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks,chart,cassette. D/ Teachnique: eliciting. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’) - Change the sentence into reported speech. 1.Mai said to Tom “ Can you give this book to Minh?” 2.Mai said to Tom “you should do morning exercise regularly” - T gets feedback and give marks. II / Presentation : ( 15’)Chatting - Asks Ss some questions about their activities and their summer holidays . 1. What do you often do on your summer holiday ? 2. Are you members of the Young Pioneers and Youth Organization ? 3. Are there any activity programs for the summer ? 4. Do you take part in them ? 5. What activity do you like most ? - Set the scene “ Nga is a student in grade eight . She wants to enroll in the activities for the summer . - Introduces the topic of the lesson and some new words to Ss . - to enroll ( translation ) - Answer application form ( visual ) - Out door activities : Games that you play in the open air rather than in a building or a house such as : football , tennis .. - Hobby (n) - Acting (n) * Checking : Rub out and remember III.Practice: ( 15’) - Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same time . - Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,s particulars . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class. - Give feedback * Name : Pham Thi Nga.

(59) * Home address : 5 Tran Phu Street * Phone number : Not available * Date of birth : April 22 , 1989 * Sex : Female * Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting - Ask Ss some questions : + What is her name ? + Where does she live ? + When was she born ? + What are her hobbies ? - Call on some Ss to answer the questions . 3 . Concept checking - What is after “ likes “ ? -> drawing - What is after “ enjoys “ ? -> acting - What do you call “ drawing “ and “ acting “ -> gerund - What is the form of “ gerund “ ? -> V- ing - When do we use “ gerund “ ? - > after some verbs : like , love , enjoy , hate , mind . * Form Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund * Drill : word cue drill - Prepare 5 cards with these cues on them : a. play soccer / volley ball b. watch TV / listen to music c. read books / do homework d. Chat with friends / do the housework e. Cook meal / decorate the house . => What are your hobbies ? I like / love playing soccer and volleyball . - Calls on Ss to practice asking and answering - Corrects mistakes if any . - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue . IV / Production : ( 7’) Survey - Asks Ss to copy down the chart and work in groups of three to ask their friends and tick on the chart . Do you like. name / Nam love / like/ /don,t hate/ like. Mai Love/ like/ don,t hate /like. - play soccer - washing up - cooking meals - performing music - gathering broken glasses - watching TV - play badminton - Gives feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, hobbies . V.Consolidation: (2’) - T asks ss to retell the form of an application, the activities that Y and Y participate in. VI/ Homework : (1‘) 1. Write about their friend,s hobbies . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………..

(60) ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: October 31st, 2011. Week 12 Period 34. Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Parts of lesson : Speak A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - ask for favors and respond to favors , offer and respond to assistance . - develope ss speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: ask for favors and respond to favors , offer and respond to assistance . C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’) - Ss write the words that they have learnt last period. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Pre- speaking: ( 12’) T sets the scene: I need a favor so what should I say - Asks Ss the meanings of the word FAVOR - T helps ss to ask for favors and respond to favors , offer and respond to assistance . + What do you say to ask for a favor ? Can you help me ? Could you do me a favor ? Can / Could you ………..? + When do you ask for favor ? Need some help + How do you say to respond to favor ? Certainly / Of course / sure No problem + What does the receptionist say ? May I help you ? + What is for ? For offering assistance + another way to offer assistance ? Do you need any help ? / Let me help you . + How do you say to respond to assistance ? Yes . No , thank you .. - Asks Ss to copy down the following phrases . Asking for favor * Can / Could you help me please ? * Could you do me a favor ? * I need a favor. Responding for favor * Certainly / of course / sure. * Can / could you ..?. * What can I do for you ? * How can I help you ? * I am sorry . I am really busy Responding to assistance * Yes / No . Thank you. Offering assistance * May I help you ?. * No problem.

(61) * Do you need any help ? * Let me help you .. * Yes . That is very kind of you . * No . thank you . I am fine . I can manage . - Asks Ss to repeat chorally and then individually all the phrases in the chart . III / Speaking : ( 15’) 1. Asks Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogues . - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Corrects pronunciation if any . 2. Use appropriate phrases to make similar dialogues about some of the following situations with a partner. (chart) - Lets Ss work in pairs . - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Gives feedback IV / Post -speaking : (9’) Situation : A receptionist wants to help a tourist who needs to go to the nearest bank .(chart) Receptionist : ……………………………? Tourist : yes . Can you ……………..? Receptionist : Sure . Turn right when you get out of the hotel . Turn left at the first corner . ………... your right . Tourist :…………………… - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make the dialogue and move around the class and help Ss . - Call on some Ss to practice the dialogue in front of the class . V.Consolidation:(3’) - Ss retell how to ask for favors and respond to favors , offer and respond to assistance VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart the expressions to offer assistance and favor and how to respond them . 2. Write the dialogue between you and a tourist who lost money . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 12 Period 35. Teaching date: November 1st, 2011. Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Parts of lesson : Listen + Test 15’ A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - complete a song for details. - develope ss listening skill. - review some structures after doing the fifteen-minute test. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : union, unite, peace, right, make a stand. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, cassette, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check – up: (15’) ĐỀ A I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1. I often play soccer Sunday afternoon. A. in B. at C. on. D. for.

(62) 2. The banks close…………….3 p.m. A. on B. between C. at D. during 3. Mr. Brown is the same age Mrs. Brown. A. as B. like C. from D. with 4. Hoang said he…….in the hospital.. A. works B. to work C. working D. worked 5. My father was good at swimming. He used to swimming in summer. A. go B. goes C. went D. going 6. We can’t understand him because he speaks so .................. . A. lovely B. well C. hard D. fast 7. Could you do me a favor? A. Yeah B. Yes ,I’m C. Excellent D. Certainly 8. …………………….is necessary for us to remember the new words. A. Revise B. Revision C. review D. revive 9. Mr. Smith likes to music in his free time. A. listens B. listened C. listen D. listening 10. They built this house 1990. A. from B. in C. at D. for 11. The “Lost shoe” is ………..old folktale. A. the B.a C.an D. ø 12. I……………noodles yesterday. A.eat B.ate C.eating D.to eat II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. Nga said “ I am a student”. Nga said she …………………………………………………………………… 2. Mr. Nhan said to Hoa: “ Can you give Nam this book?” Mr. Nhan asked Hoa……………………………………….…………………… ĐỀ B I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1. …………………….is necessary for us to remember the new words. A. Revise B. Revision C. review D. revive 2. The banks close…………….3 p.m. A. on B. between C. at D. during 3. I……………noodles yesterday. A.eat B.ate C.eating D.to eat 4. Hoang said he…….in the hospital.. A. works B. to work C. working D. worked 5. My father was good at swimming. He used to swimming in summer. A. go B. goes C. went D. going 6. We can’t understand him because he speaks so .................. . A. lovely B. well C. hard D. fast 7. Could you do me a favor? A. Yeah B. Yes ,I’m C. Excellent D. Certainly 8. I often play soccer Sunday afternoon. A. in B. at C. on D. for 9. Mr. Smith likes to music in his free time. A. listens B. listened C. listen D. listening 10. They built this house 1990. A. from B. in C. at D. for 11. The “Lost shoe” is ………..old folktale. A. the B.a C.an D. ø.

(63) 12. Mr. Brown is the same age Mrs. Brown. A. as B. like C. from D. with II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. Na said “ I am a student”. Na said she …………………………………………………………………… 2. Mr. Nha Vy said to Ha: “ Can you go to the market?” Mr. Nha Vy asked Ha……..…………………………………………………… ANSWER KEYS ĐỀ A I.( 0,5m x 12) 1C 2C 3A 4A 5D 6D 7D 8B 9D 10B 11C 12B II.( 2ms x 4)(Danh cho lop A 1m x 4) 1. Nga said she was a student. 2. Mr. Nhan asked Hoa to give Nam this book. ĐỀ B I.( 0,5m x 12) 1B 2C 3B 4D 5A 6D 7D 8C 9D 10B 11C 12A II.( 2ms x 4)(Danh cho lop A 1m x 4) 1.Na said she was a student. 2. Mr. Nha Vy asked Ha to go to the market. II / Pre - listening : ( 7’) - Introduces the topic of the listening and some new words to Ss . - to unite = doan ket , hop nhat , ket hop - peace (n) >< war (n) - Asks Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the song - Gets them to share with their partners and report their predictions .Then write them on the board . III / While - listening : ( 13’) - Turns on the tape 3 times and ask Ss to check their predictions . - Calls on some Ss to read their results - Gives feedback Children of our land unite Let,s sing for peace , Let,s sing for right . Let,s sing for the love between north and south , Oh, children of our land , unite . Children of the world hold hands . Let,s show our love from place to place . Let,s shout out loud , Let,s make a stand , Oh , children of the world , hold hands . -Turns on the tape once more to check the results again . IV / Post - listening : (7’) - Asks Ss to work in groups to learn how to sing the song + Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally . - Calls on some Ss from each groups to sing a song. V.Consolidation: (2’) -Asks ss to retell the meaning of this song. VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Copy down the completed song . 2. Prepare the next lesson. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………..

(64) ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: November 4th, 2011. Week 12 Period 36. Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Parts of lesson : Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know more about the Ho Chi Minh communist youth Union in Viet Nam. - develop ss reading skill. -know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : + encourage, Citizenship, coeducational, voluntary, lead, establish. 2.Grammar: + Present simple tense. C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm – up: (5’)Net work Đội thiếu niên Đoàn thanh niên Các tổ chức thanh , thiếu niên ở Việt Nam II.Pre – Reading : (15’) T sets the scene: - T shows the flag of the Ho Chi Minh communist youth Union in Viet Nam and asks ss to answer the questions. + What does the flag of organization refer? + When was the Youth Union founded? - From ss answer,T leads into new lesson and presents some new words. - organization (n) : ( example) - citizenship (n) : ( example) - movement (n): ( example) - wareness (n) : ( example) - personality (n) : ( example) - (to) establish (= found): ( translation) - (to) encourage : ( example) - T helps ss to pronounce words. * Write T or F : Statements Guess a. Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union is an organization for the youth from 15 to 30 years old around the world. b. The Union was founded by President Ho Chi Minh on March 26 1930 . c. The Youth Union is the other name of Ho Chi Minh Communist Union. d. This organization often holds social activities. III.While – Reading : (15’).

(65) 1. Read the text and check T / F prediction: a. F b. F c. T d. T 2. Match the name of the organizations with its meaning: A B 1.Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union a. Hội liên hiệp thanh niên VN 2. The Young Pioneers Organization b. Hội sinh viên VN 3. The Vietnam Youth Federation c. Đoàn TNCS HCM 4. The Vietnam Students Union d. Tổ chức thanh thiếu niên tình nguyện 1. c 2. d 3. a 4. b 3. Answer the questions: a. At what age can one join the Youth Union? - 16 to 30 years old b. When was the Youth Union founded? - March 26 1931 c. What is the complete name of the Youth Union? - Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union d. Can you name some activities of the Youth Union? - some activities of the Youth Union are such as Helping the Handicapped, Cleaning the enviroment, Green summer volunteers Campaign. e. These activities aim to help the young develop their public awareness and form their personality. f. President Ho Chi Minh Established the Guidelines for the Vietnames Youth. VI.Post – Reading : ( 7’) Complete the following sentences: a. The Youth Union was founded in ................................... b. In .................. the Youth Union was official named as it is called today. c. The Youth Union’s activities aim to help the young develop ............................................... d. Its aims and principles have been ................................ for the young Vietnamese people *Answers : a. 1931 b. 1976 c. their public awareness d. the guidelines V.Consolidation: (2’) - Asks ss to retell some main ideas of the Ho Chi Minh communist youth Union in Viet Nam. VI.Homework : ( 1’) - Learn by heart vocabulary and practice the text - Write the answer s on notebooks - Prepare Unit 6 : Write Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 13 Period 37. Teaching date: November 7th, 2011 Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Parts of lesson : Write. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - write a letter about a future plan using be going to . - develop writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : - to raise fund , a bank, natural resources 2.Grammar: - be going to. C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork..

(66) E / Procedure : I / Warm up : ( 5’)Revision of the structure Be going to - Asks Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a future plan . - Gets Ss to make the sentence : “ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin with a letter from A to Z Ex: T : I am going to accept their invitation . S1 : I am going to buy a new bicycle S2 : I am going to clean the floor . S3 : I am going to dust the furniture .. II / Pre - writing : ( 10’) - Introduces the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss . - to raise fund ( translation ) - a bank ( visual ) - natural resources : coal oil , iron .. under the ground or the sea . - Helps ss to pronounce words. - Asks Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y members of the school “ - Asks some questions to check their understanding a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in the recycling program ? b. What is the purpose of the recycling program ? c. What other programs can members of the Y and Y participate in ? - Gets Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions . - Gives feedback and ask them to practice in open pairs . - Asks some questions to set the scene : * Who writes the letter ? ( Nga ) * To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh ) * Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes ) * What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She writes about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is going to participate ) - Gets Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the letter . - Gives feedback :1. community 2.recycling 3.collect 4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn 8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping - Calls on some Ss to read the complete letter and correct mistakes if any . III / While - writing : ( 15’) - Sets the scene “ Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y and Y Green Group , about the activities that she is going to do .” - Asks Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt . * Checking : some questions : a. Why does Hoa look happy ? b. What is she going to do in the environment month ? c. What are they doing to earn money for their school Y&Y ? - Calls on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in front of the class . - Asks Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents . - Gets Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter on subboard . - Moves around the class and helps then if they are necessary . IV/ Post - writing : ( 12’) - Chooses four letters from 4 group and stick them on the board . - Gets the whole class to read the 4 letters and correct them . - Gives feedback : Suggested letter Dear Mom and Dad , I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in the Y & Y Green Group of my school ..

(67) The green Group is holding an environment month plan . We are going to clean the lakes ,banks on weekends . We are also going to plant trees and flowers in the parks and water them every afternoon after class . We are planting young trees and plants to sell to other schools . I hope that we can bring more green to the city and earn some money for the school Y&Y . The program is very interesting and useful , is not it ? I am still in a very good health . I will tell you more about the group activities later . With love , Hoa . V.Consolidation: (2’) - T asks ss to retell the usage of Be going to. VI / Homework : ( 1’) - Asks each student to help Hoa write a letter to her parents in their notebooks. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: November 8th, 2011. Week 13 Period 38. Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Parts of lesson : Language focus A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - use Present with future meaning / Gerunds / modals : may , can , could . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : a rest home, an orphanage 2.Grammar: Present with future meaning / Gerunds / modals : may , can , could. C/ Teaching aids : Textbooks,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’) - T asks ss to make 2 sentences with Be Going to. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (5’) Brainstorming *Possible answers : - Clean up the streets - Help elderly people - Take part in sports - Help handicappied / street children - Collect and empty garbage ….. III / Presentation : Activity 1. Present tense with future meaning : ( 10’) T Sets the scene : Introduces the dialogue “ Lan and Mai are members of the Y&Y organization . They are talking about the summer activity program” - T elicits ss some new words. - a rest home : a place where old or sick people are cared for - an orphanage : a place where children without parents live * Checking : Rub out and remember Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ? Mai : at Dong Xuan Market ..

(68) Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………? Mai : On January 9 Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..? Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm . - Asks Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue . - Calls on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai to practice the dialogue . - Gives feedback 1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage 4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at c. Concept checking :- Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding a. When do we “ where “ ? b. When do we use “ when “ ? c. When do we use “ what time “ ? d. Is the date at present or in the future ? e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ? => We use simple present tense to express an action that happens in the future . - Asks Ss to practice asking and answering about the Y&Y activity by using the following cues - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue . - Gives feedback Activity 2. Gerunds : (15’) * Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving * Survey : - Asks Ss to work in groups of three to ask their friends and stick on the chart . - Gives feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, hobbies . Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like cooking and especially hate washing dishes . .. Activity 3. Modals : may , can , could (7’) - Asks Ss to repeat the uses of the offering assistance , asking for favors and how to respond . - Asks Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Gives feedback a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ? B : Can you take me across the road ? C : Could you help me with this math problem ? D : Can you water the flowers in the garden? b / A : May I help you ? A : Do you need any help ? B : Let me help you . A : Yes . That is very kind of you . - Asks them to practice the dialogue in front of the class . IV.Consolidation: (2’) - T asks ss to retell the usage of Present with future meaning , verbs folloing by Gerunds, ask for a favor with Can /Could/May. V. / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 13 Period 39. Teaching date: November 11th, 2011.

(69) A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 4 to unit 6 so that they can supplement what they are short of. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : unit4, unit 5 , unit 6 2.Grammar: unit4, unit 5 , unit 6 C/ Teaching aids : paper notes. D/ Teachnique: E / Procedure ( Đề A) I.Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others .(0,5m) 1. a. upset b. equipment c. message d. festival 2. a. straw b. wardrobe c. mark d. saucepan II.Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others.(0.5m) 1. a. agree b. arrange c. conduct d. emigrate 2 a. precaution b. scissors c. safety d. cupboard III.Choose the best answer : (3ms) 1…………..do they collect and empty garbage? – On March 9. a. Where b. What c.When d. How 2.Our pupils are………………about the holiday. a. sad b. excited c. sociable d. tired 3. Last Sunday, Minh and Nam ………………….dolphins some fish. a.to give b. giving c. gave d. gaves 4. John used to…………………in Da Lat. a. staying b. stays c. stayed d. stay 5. Do you enjoy……………in the rain ? a. walk b.walks c. to walk d. walking 6.I’m going to Laos ……………Wednesday. a. on b. at c. in d. between 7.We must be there…………..8.30 and 9.15. a. on b. at c. in d. between 8. We collect used paper, glass and cans and send them for…………………. a. recycling b. recycled c. recycle d. recyclable 9. Na: “Could you do me a favor ?” Hang: “…………………” a. Yeah b. Excellent c. Certainly d. Yes, I am 10. Miss Nhan asked me …………….you this computer. a. to give b. giving c. gave d. is giving 11.His English …………………is really good. a. pronunceable b. pronunciation c. pronounce d. pronoun 12.She studies English………………. a. excellent b. bad c. well d. good IV.Read the passage: *Choose the best answer to complete the passage: (1m) Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union is an organization for Vietnamese youth from 16 to 30 years of age. The Union …………..(1) good character, love for the nation, and encourages good citizenship, soft skills and personal …………..(2) The Union was founded on March 26, 1931…………..(3) the beloved President Ho Chi Minh. The Youth Union together with other youth organizations often hold social activities ………………(4)helping the handicapped, cleaning the enviroment, green summer volunteers campaign, and other similar.

(70) movements. These activities aim to help the Young develop their public awareness and form their personality. 1. a. build b. to build c. builds d. building 2. a. principle b. aim c. fitness d. activity 3. a. in b. by c. on d. at 4. a. example b. such as c. such d. and *Answer the question: ( 2ms) Liverpool, October 7th, 2011 Dear Jose, Thank you for your letter. It was interesting. And thank you for your photographs. Your village looks beautiful. Now I would like to tell you about myself and my family. I live in a town about 40 miles (that’s about 64 kilometers) from London. I have one brother and one sister and we are all in the local school. My mother is a tourist officer and she goes to London everyday by train. My father is a computer grammer and he works at home. On the weekends, I often play football with the school team. I sometimes go to the local gym. There is a very good pool at the gym, too. I look forward to your next letter. Best wishes, Andrew.☺ 1. Who wrote the letter? To whom? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. How many people are there in Andrew’s family? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Where does Jose’s family live? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Writing: *Sentences transformation: (1m) 1. I usually watched football every Sunday last year. I used……….................................................................................................................................... 2. “Please give Grammar book to Mary” ,Van said to Lien. Van told Lien.................................................................................................................................... 3. She likes eating chicken. She enjoys……................................................................................................................................. 4. Mr Hung said to Hoa “You should practice speaking English everyday”. Mr Hung said.................................................................................................................................... . *Make sentences from the given words: ( 1m) 5. Mai / like / read / Englishbooks. ........................................................................................................................................................... 6. I / used / swim / the river. ........................................................................................................................................................... VI.Listen and choose the right answer: ( 1m ).

(71) Name : Le Song Vu Home address : ......................................(1)Street, Ha Noi. Phone number : ………………………………………..(2) Date of birth : …………………………………………(3) Sex: Male Interests: ……………………………………………….(4). 1. a. 5 Tran Phu b. 9 Tran Phu 2 a. 880 475 b. 880 457 3. a. April 22, 1989 b. April 20, 1980 4. a. drawing and outdoor activities c. walking and outdoor activities. c.13 Quang Trung d. 30 Quang Trung c. 808 475 d. 808 457 c. May 22, 1989 d. May 20, 1980 b. acting and outdoor activities d. playing guitar and outdoor activities. ( Đề B) I.Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others .(0,5m) 1. a. bead b. steamer c. disease d. pearl 2. a. wisdom b. memory c. socket d. directory II.Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others.(0.5m) 1. a. appear b. underline c. highlight d. injure 2 a. citizenship b. application c. interest d. orphanage III.Choose the best answer : (3ms) 1…………..do they collect and empty garbage? – On March 9. a. When b. How c.Where d. What 2.Our pupils are………………about the holiday. a. excited b. sad c. tired d. sociable 3. Last Sunday, Minh and Nam ………………….dolphins some fish. a.to give b. gave c. giving d. gaves 4. John used to…………………in Da Lat. a. stays b. staying c. stay d. stayed 5. Do you enjoy……………in the rain ? a. walks b. walking c. walks d. to walk 6.I’m going to Laos ……………Wednesday. a. in b. between c. on d. at 7.We must be there…………..8.30 and 9.15. a. in b. between c. on d. at 8.We collect used paper, glass and cans and send them for…………………. a. recyclable b. recycled c. recycle d. recycling 9. Na: “Could you do me a favor ?” Hang: “…………………” a. Certainly b. Excellent c. Yeah d. Yes, I am 10. Miss Nhan asked me …………….you this computer. a. is giving b. giving c. gave d. to give 11.His English …………………is really good. a. pronunceable b. pronoun c. pronounce d. pronunciation 12.She studies English………………. a. excellent b. bad c. good d. well.

(72) IV.Read the passage: *Choose the best answer to complete the passage: (1m) Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union is an organization for Vietnamese youth from 16 to 30 years of age.The Union …………..(1) good character, love for the nation, and encourages good citizenship, soft skills and personal …………..(2) The Union was founded on March 26, 1931…………..(3) the beloved President Ho Chi Minh. The Youth Union together with other youth organizations often hold social activities ………………(4)helping the handicapped, cleaning the enviroment, green summer volunteers campaign, and other similar movements. These activities aim to help the Young develop their public awareness and form their personality. 1. a. building b. builds 2. a. activity b. fitness 3. a. in b. on 4. a. and b. such *Answer the question: ( 2ms). c. to build c. principle c. by c. such as. d. builded d. aim d. at d. example. Liverpool, October 7th, 2011 Dear Jose, Thank you for your letter. It was interesting. And thank you for your photographs. Your village looks beautiful. Now I would like to tell you about myself and my family. I live in a town about 40 miles (that’s about 64 kilometers) from London. I have one brother and one sister and we are all in the local school. My mother is a tourist officer and she goes to London everyday by train. My father is a computer grammer and he works at home. On the weekends, I often play football with the school team. I sometimes go to the local gym. There is a very good pool at the gym, too. I look forward to your next letter. Best wishes, Andrew.☺ 1. Who wrote the letter? To whom? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. How many people are there in Andrew’s family? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Where does Jose’s family live? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Writing: *Sentences transformation: (1m) 1. I usually watched football every Sunday last year. I used……….................................................................................................................................... 2. “Please give Grammar book to Mary” ,Van said to Lien. Van told Lien.................................................................................................................................... 3. He enjoys reading books. He likes……...................................................................................................................................... 4. Mr Hung said to Hoa “You should practice speaking English everyday”. Mr Hung said.................................................................................................................................... *Make sentences from the given words: ( 1m) 5. Mai / like / read / Englishbooks. ........................................................................................................................................................... 6. I / used / swim / the river. ........................................................................................................................................................... VI.Listen and choose the right answer: ( 1m ).

(73) Name : Le Song Vu Home address : ......................................(1)Street, Ha Noi. Phone number : ………………………………………..(2) Date of birth : …………………………………………(3) Sex: Male Interests: ……………………………………………….(4). 1. a. 5 Tran Phu b. 9 Tran Phu 2 a. 880 475 b. 880 457 3. a. April 22, 1989 b. April 20, 1980 4. a.drawing and outdoor activities c. walking and outdoor activities. c.13 Quang Trung d. 30 Quang Trung c. 808 475 d. 808 457 c. May 22,1989 d. May 20, 1980 b. acting and outdoor activities d. playing guitar and outdoor activities ***THE END***. MA TRẬN Nhận biết TN TL. Chủ đề I.Phonetics + Vowel sound + stressed. Thông hiểu TN TL. 4. Tổng 4. 1. 1. 12 II.Lexico and grammar + Language functions + prepositions of time + question words + reported speech + adverbs of manner + past simple tense + gerund III. Reading. Vân dụng TN TL. 12 3. 3. 4. 3. 7.

(74) + A text about Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union +A letter IV. Writing + Reported speech + Used to + V bare + Like / enjoy V. Listening +Unit 6: The young pioneers club Tổng. 1. 3. 2 6. 6 2. 4. 2 4. 1 21. 1. 7 5. 6 3. 34 2. 10. ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề KI ỂM TRA 1 TI ẾT LỚP 8(L ẦN II–HKI) ĐỀA I . (0,25mx2) 1.b 2.c II. (0,25mx2) 1.d 2.a III.(0,25mx12)1.c 2. b 3.c 4.d 5.d 6.a 7.d 8.a 9.c 10.a 11.b 12.c IV. (0,25mx4) 1.c 2.c 3.b 4.b *Answer the question: ( 2ms) 1. Andrew wrote the letter(0,5m). To Jose.(0,5m) 2. There are five people in Jose’s family. (0,5m) 3. Jose’s family live in Liverpool. V.*Sentences transformation: (0,25m x 4): 1. I used to watch football every Sunday 2. Van told Lien to give Grammar book to Mary. 3. She enjoys eating chicken. 4. Mr Hung said Hoa should practice speaking English everyday. *Make sentences from the given words: ( 0,5m x 2) 5. Mai likes reading Englishbooks. 6. I used to swim in the river. VI.Listen and choose the right answer: ( 0,25m x 4 )1b 2c 3d 4d Secretary: Hello. May I help you? Vu : Good morning. I’m enrolling for the activities for this summer. Secretary: Right. Let me get an application form and we can fill it out.What’s your full name,please? Vu : Le Song Vu Secretary: And When were you born ? Vu : May 20,1980 . Secretary : Where do you live and do you have a phone number ? Vu : I live at 9 Tran Phu street,and my phone number is 808 475. Secretary : Now, what are your hobbies? Vu : I like playing guitar and outdoor activities. Secretary : Well, I will call you then. Vu : All right. Thank you. ******************************************************* ĐỀB I . (0,25mx2) 1.d 2.c II. (0,25mx2) 1.a 2.b III.(0,25mx12)1.a 2. a 3.b 4.c 5.b 6.c 7.b 8.d 9.a 10.d 11.d 12.d.

(75) IV. (0,25mx4) 1.b 2.b 3.c 4.c * *Answer the question: ( 2ms) 1. Andrew wrote the letter(0,5m). To Jose.(0,5m) 2. There are five people in Jose’s family. (0,5m) 3. Jose’s family live in Liverpool. V.*Sentences transformation: (0,25m x 4): 1. I used to watch football every Sunday 2. Van told Lien to give Grammar book to Mary. 3. He likes reading books. 4. Mr Hung said Hoa should practice speaking English everyday . *Make sentences from the given words: ( 0,5m x 2) 5. Mai likes reading Englishbooks. 6. I used to swim in the river. VI.Listen and choose the right answer: ( 0,25m x 4 )1b 2c 3d 4d Secretary: Hello. May I help you? Vu : Good morning. I’m enrolling for the activities for this summer. Secretary: Right. Let me get an application form and we can fill it out.What’s your full name,please? Vu : Le Song Vu Secretary: And When were you born ? Vu : May 20, 1980. Secretary : Where do you live and do you have a phone number ? Vu : I live at 9 Tran Phu street,and my phone number is 808 475. Secretary : Now , what are your hobbies? Vu : I like playing guitar and outdoor activities. Secretary : Well, I will call you then. Vu : All right. Thank you. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: November 14th, 2011. Week 14. Unit 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be helped + make comparisons . + ask for informations and assistance. + write a community notice. + use the present perfect tense. II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassets III. Procedure :. Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Lesson 4. Getting started Listen and read Speak Listen Read. Reading for specifict information about places in the neighborhood. Practice speaking about how to send a pacel or to post a letter . to listen for details to complete the advertisment. Reading for details about the opening of a shoping mall in.

(76) Lesson 5 Lesson 6. Write. Nam;s neighborhood. Writing a letter about the future plan.. Language focus. - Further practice in simple present tense. ********************************************************************* Week 14 Period 40. Teaching date: November 14th, 2011 Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD Parts of lesson : Getting started and Listen and Read. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able - know more about Na’s new neighbor . - know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : close by, to serve, a pancake, tasty. 2.Grammar: present perfect tense. C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , boards , chalk D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : ( 5’)Getting started - Asks Ss to match the names of places with the suitable pictures - Asks for their meanings to make sure Ss know exactly what they mean * Answers : a. grocery store b. stadium c. wet market d. drug store e. hairdresser,s f. swimming pool II / Pre - reading : (13’) - T sets the scene: scene “ Nam and Na are talking about the place where they live . But Na is new there . “ - Sets the Questions : + Who is new in this neighborhood? + How long has Nam lived in this neighborhood? + Where does Na want to go ? - From ss answer , T introduces the topic of the passage reading and some new words - close by (adv) : a short distance - to serve : give sb food or drink - a pancake : banh ran - tasty (a) = delicious (a) * Checking vocabulary : What and where - Asks Ss to listen to the tape and predict the answers and call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . - From ss answer ,T helps ss to know more about present perfect tense with Since and For. => Form : have / has + past participle Use : to talk about something which started in the past and continues up to the present We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ with the Present Perfect Tense For + length of time Since + starting point III / While - reading : ( 15’).

(77) - Asks Ss to read silently the dialogue between Nam and Na then ask them if their answers are correct or not . - Givesfeedback : a. He has lived there for 10 years . b. Na wants to go to a restaurant . - Asks Ss to do the exercise 2 / 64 individually , then compare with their partners . - Calls on some Ss to read their answers and give feedback a. new b. last week c. tired d. restaurant e. Hue f. pancakes - Gives Ss some answers and ask them to make questions . a. Nam has lived here for 10 years . b. Yes. my mother is too tired to cook . c. The restaurant serves Hue food . d. Hue food is very good. - Asks Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and answering => Questions a. How long has Nam lived here ? b. Is Na,s mother tired ? c. What kind of food does the restaurant serve ? d. What is the food like ? IV / Post - reading : ( 9’) - T asks ss to comple the sentences using present perfect tense.( chart) 1. I /been / Kbang / 10 years. 2. She / studied / English /2005 3. We / met / each other / 1990 4.How long / Na / lived / Hue ? - Moves around the class and help Ss - Calls on some Ss to read their writings aloud . - Corrects mistakes . 1. I have been in Kbang for 10 years. 2. She has studied English since 2005. 3. We have met each other since 1990. 4.How long has Na lived in Hue ? IV.Consolidation: (2’) - T asks ss to retell the usage of Present perfect tense. V / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Write the complete writing about their neighborhood . 2. Do exercise in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 14 Period 41. Teaching date: November 15th, 2011 Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD Parts of lesson : Speak. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be abl eto - ask the clerk about the price of the parcel and how to send it. . - develop ss speaking skill..

(78) B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : parcel, surface mail , airmail 2.Grammar: . C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , boards , scale, gifts, letters, postcards. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check - up: ( 5’) Complete sentences with present perfect tense. 1. Mai / live / Hue / 5 years. 2. Nhan and Na / be / here / Monday. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (3’) Chatting - Shows a letter and ask Ss some questions + What is this ? + Where can I post it to my friend ? + How can I post it ? + How much ? + Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ? + Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?  Lead in the new lesson . III / Pre- Speaking: (12’) - T hangs on the picture and sets the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to Qui Nhon , so she has to go to the post office .” - Gives Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in pairs to compare their answers . - Asks Ss to read the dialogue and find out the answers a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface mail ? Why ? b. What is the weight of her parcel ? c. How much does she pay ? - Calls on Ss to ask and answer the questions * Answers : a. Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail because it is much cheaper . b. Her parcel is five kilograms . c. She pays 19, 200 dongs . - From ss answer,T presents some words. - air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air - surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus , train or ship … - parcel ( n ) - Ss pronounce words,T feedbacks and corrects the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue . Correct their pronunciation - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class - T feedbacks and corrects the misatkes in pronunciation if needed. IV / Speaking : (15’) - Sets the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue . 1. Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail - Asks Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the clerk in the post office . - Elicits and encourages Ss to make the dialogue themselves . Expected dialogue Clerk : Can I help you ? Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontom . Clerk : Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? Mrs Lan : I send it airmail . How much is it ? Clerk : Let me see . Mmm , 15 grams , it is only 1,200 dongs . Mrs Lan : Here you are ..

(79) Clerk : Thank you . - Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs - Gives Ss some situations : ( chart) 2. Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g 3. Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / 2 kg 4. Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / 5 kgs . - Gets Ss to work in pairs , practicing three dialogues and move around class to help Ss . - Gets Ss to make the dialogue.( using the information on chart) . Surface mail Airmail Items Weight Charge(VND) Items Weight Charge(VND) Letter 1- 20g 1000 Letter 1- 20g 2000 Postcard 10g 4.400 Postcard 10 g 8.800 Parcel 1- 5kg 66.000 Parcel 1 – 5kg 132.000 - Elicits and encourages Ss to make the dialogue themselves. - Feedbacks and corrects the misatkes if needed. V.Post- Speaking : ( 8’) - Asks ss to play role and make the dialogues by themselves. - Feedbacks and corrects the misatkes if needed. VI.Consolidation: (1’) - T asks ss to retell where and how to send a letter / postcard /parcel. VII / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 14 Period 42. Teaching date: November 18th, 2011 Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD Parts of lesson : Listen + correcting test. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know what Na is going to do on the weekend by listening . - listen and complete the missing gaps. - develop ss listening skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : culture house, town ground, hall. 2.Grammar: . C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm - up: ( 5’) Brainstorming and guessing - Asks Ss to look at 4 advertisements of “ what is on this week ? “ and get Ss to guess what is in the bank 2-3-4 1. Movies 2. Place -> Stadium School ground City Town ground 3. Activity -> drama / play.

(80) English Speak Club / Contest Dancing Picture Exhibition Music 4. Place -> Gallery Culture house School City hall II / Pre - listening : ( 5’) - Sets the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood . She is talking to Nam about what she is going to do on the weekend .” - Asks to guess the answer and writes on board. - Asks Ss to listen to the tape three times and give the answers and fill in the blanks in each advertisement. - T presents the newwords. - Ss pronounce the newwords. - T –ss get feedback. III / While - listening : (15’) - Lets Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers - Gives feedback a. The newcomer b. Town Ground c. English speaking contest d . Culture House - Asks Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66 - Gets Ss to guess which is true , which is false which has no information - Asks Ss to share their ideas with their friends . - Gives feedback - Lets Ss listen to the conversation again and tick in the correct boxes : True ? False or No information ( chart) Statements T F No a. Na does not know the b neighborhood very well X b. Na does not like movies X c. Na will go to the photo exhibition this weekend X d. Na will not go to the English speaking Contest X e. Na will go to the soccer match with Nam X f. Nam is a soccer fan . X - Asks Ss some questions to check their understanding of the conversation . - Turns on the tape again . a. Does Na like movies ? b. Why will not she go to see the film “ The New comer “ ? c. Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ? d. Who will Na go to the soccer match with ? e. What time does the match start ? IV / Post - Listening : ( 4’) - Asks Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends about what Na is going to do this weekend . - Calls on some volunteers from each group to tell the whole class about Na . VI. .Correcting the test: ( 15’) - Ss deliver the test to ss. - T gets out some mistakes that ss got in the test. + reported speech. + language funtions - T retells some structures using in the test. - T asks ss to do the exercise ..

(81)  Rewrite the sentences: 1. “Can you send this parcel to Nam?” Hoa said to Na - Hoa asked Na to send Nam this parcel. 2. ‘You should do exercise regularly.”Mai said to Lan. - Mai said Lan should do exercise regularly. 3. “Please buy me a cake” Minh’s mother siad to Minh. - Minh’s mother told Minh to buy her a cake. VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Write a short passage about what Na is going to do . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: November 21st, 2011. Week 15 Period 43. Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD Parts of lesson : Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - understand the passage about a new shopping Mall - develop ss reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : a roof, convenient , a selection, available , a mall, a resident. 2.Grammar: . C/ Teaching aids : Textbook, chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : ( 5’) Guessing the words - Gives Ss the definitions and get Ss to find out the words as quickly as possible . 1. a place where you can buy everything 2. A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit . 3. A place where you can buy books . 4. A place where you can come to eat . 5. A place where you can come to see the movies . 6. A person who comes to the store and buys something . => Lead in the new lesson II / Pre - reading : (15’) - Sets the scene “ In Nam,s neighborhood , there is a new shopping mall . - Asks Ss to think about the convenience of the mall .. the convenience of the new shopping mall.

(82)  Possible answers : - wide selection of goods - lower prices - buy many things at the same time - have fun or relax while shopping - Introduces the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss : - a roof ( picture ) - convenient (a) (explaination) - a selection = a process of choosing carefully . - available (a) (explaination) - a mall = many stores , restaurants , even movies theaters are under one roof . - a resident (n)(example) * Checking vocabulary : What and where III / While - reading : ( 15’) - Asks Ss to read the text silently and compare their or get more information . - Gives feedback - Explains the meanings of some phrases rapidly + under one roof + shop in comfort + take their business + offer a wider selection + especially stores + have been concerned about * True / False statements - Gets Ss look at the statements in the box and get them to read the text again and decide which statements are true , which are false . Statements True False 1. A mall is open six days a week . 2. There are more than 50 stores in the mall . 3. Everyone in the neighborhood is pleased about the new mall . 4. It will be more comfortable to shop in the mall than in the present shopping area . 5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu Street may have to close . - Lets Ss correct the false statements 1. The mall is open daily 2. There are 50 stores in the mall . 3. Not everyone is pleased . The owner of the small stores on Tran Phu Street are not happy . * Comprehension questions : - Asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in the exercise 2/ 68 - Calls on Ss to practice asking and answering the questions - Gets all Ss to work in pairs - Gives feedback IV / Post - reading : (7’) - Gives a situation and ask Ss to discuss it “ Do you want to have a new mall in your neighborhood ? If there is one , what will happen to the residents ? “ - Calls on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class . V.Consolidation: (2’) - Asks ss to close the book and answer the question about the reading text. + Is there a new shopping mall in Nam’s neighborhood today? + Is it convenient? + What are there in the shopping mall?.

(83) VI / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Copy their ideas about there is a mall in their neighborhood . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . ************************************************************************* Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 15 Period 44. Teaching date: November 22nd, 2011 Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD Parts of lesson : Write. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - write a notice. - develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : effects, contact,hardware store . 2.Grammar: Simple present tense. C/ Teaching aids : Textbook,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’) - Ss write the words that they have learnt last period and answer the question b, c at page 68. - T gets feedback and marks. I / Warm up : (5’) Chatting 1. Have you ever written a notice ? 2. To whom ? 3. What for ? 4. What type ? => Lead in the new lesson . II / Pre - writing : (12’) - Introduces the topic of the writing and sets the scene “ The residents and store owners on Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to discuss the effects of the new mall . “ - From the notice,T presents somes words. - effects (n) (expanation) - contact (v) (expanation) - hardware store ( n) (expanation) - Ss pronounce words,T gets feedback and corrects the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. - T gives some guiding questions. a. Why are the residents and store owners on Tran Phu street going to hold a meeting ? b. When will they hold a meeting ? What time ? c. Where will they hold the meeting ? - Gets Ss to read the notice and answer some questions to check their understanding. - Calls on some pairs to practice asking answering the questions . - Gives feedback a. To discuss the effects of the new mall b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 p.m c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao Street , Binh ,s hardware store . - Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full sentences ..

(84) * Reading : - Asks Ss to read the passage and ask some questions to check their understanding , get them to use short answers . 1. What is the English Speaking club going to hold ? 2. Where and when will it be held ? 3. What time ? d. Who is the person contact ? - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . III / While -writing : ( 15’) - Gets Ss to write the notice individually - Monitors and helps them write - Asks Ss to share with their partners - Checks some notices and correct them - Writes the model notice on the board Suggested answers : The school English Speaking club Holding A Speaking Contest to celebrate teacher,s day Date : November 15 Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm Place : Hall 204 , Building G Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at the above address for more information . V / Post - writing : ( 15’) - Asks Ss to write one notice about their class meeting - Gets them to work in pair. - Calls on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class . - Gives feedback . V.Consolidation: (2’) - Asks ss to give the content of a notice. VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Write the other notices at home . 2. Do exercises in workbook Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 15 Period 45. Teaching date: November 25th, 2011 Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD Parts of lesson : Language focus. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + use Present Perfect Tense. + make comparisons . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : pocket-watch, wristwatch, backpack 2.Grammar: Present Perfect Tense and comparisons . C/ Teaching aids : 10 cards for pelmanism , poster .. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, group work. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : ( 5’) - Collects some notices that Ss write at home, gets feedback and marks. II Warm up : ( 5’) Matching (Activity 1).

(85) - Sticks a poster of infinitives and Past Participles on the board. - Divides the class into 2 teams - Gets Ss form 2 teams to go to the board and write each pair of infinitive – past participle be see collected go worked lived. do. seen. eat. attended. write. been. written. eaten. work. attend done live collect gone Answers :  be – been write – written  go – gone live – lived  see – seen collect – collected  do – done attend – attended  eat – eaten work – worked - Gets Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past participles of irregular verbs . III / Presentation 1.Activity 2. Ex 2 : (7’) - Asks Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which is the length of time and which is starting point . - Reads out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For - Goes on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since + for five minutes/ three hours /10 weeks / 2 years. +since January /1990 / the summer /Friday. 2.Activity 3. Ex 3 : ( 5’) - Asks Ss to make full sentences using the present perfect tense. - Corrects the mistakes. Example : I / live / here / 1990  I have lived here since 1990. - Gives the answer. b….haven’t eaten…. c…..haven’t seen…….. d……have attended……… e. …….has worked……. f…………has collected……… 3 .Activity 4 .Ex 4: (7’) - Asks Ss to complete the conversations - Has them work in pairs - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Gives feedback 1. have been 2. hope 3. have lived 4. is 5. want 6. looks 7. have been 8. have seen - Asks Ss to work in closed pairs . 4 Activity 5 . Ex 5 ( 10’) - T elicits ss some new words. - Ss pronounce words. - T-ss get feedback. * Game : Pelmanism different. cheap. expensive. long. same.

(86) modern. short. big. small. - Shows Ss 3 books , a red book and a yellow one which have the same size and a bigger brown dictionary then ask Ss to make comparisons Example : - He is like his father. - The red book is the same as the yellow one - The red book is as big as the yellow one - The yellow book is different from the brown dictionary . - The yellow is not as big as the brown dictionary . => Form : + S + to be/ V + like(prep) + O + S+ tobe/ V + the same (N) as + O + S+ tobe/ V+ as + Adj/ Adv +as +O + S+ tobe( not )/ V+ so / as + Adj/ Adv +as +O + S+ tobe/ V+ different from + O - Asks Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 5 / 70 - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Gives feedback a. not as large as b. different from c. different from /notas/so cheap as d. the same as e. as cheap/expensive as f. different from g. as long as h. not as modern as i. not as/so cheap as IV.Consolidation: (5’) * Complete the sentences: 1. I/ study/ English/ 8 years. - I have studied English for 8 years. 2. Huy / not/ see/ Tom/ Monday - Huy hasn’t seen Tom since Monday. 3. Na’s mother / live/ Kbang/ 20 months - Na’s mother has lived in Kbang for 20 months. 4. We/ go/ Dalat/ March - We have gone to Dalat since March. - Ss do the exercise in pairs. - Ss write the answer on board. - T- s get feedback. V / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................................... Unit 8: Country life and city life I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be helped + To make comparisons . + ask for informations and assistance. + to write a community notice..

(87) II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassets III. Procedure : Lesson 1. Getting started Listen and read. Practicing the dialogue to understand the changes in the countryside nowadays. Lesson 2. Speak. Talking about the changes of the town and the place where they live.. Listen. Giving students in listening for details and revision of how to make a phone call.. Lesson 3. Read. Reading the text about life in the countryside to understand the main ideas.. Lesson 4. Write. Giving students practice in writing an informal letter about their neighborhood.. Lesson 5. Language focus. Giving students further practice in using the present progressive tense and comparative and superlative adjectives. Week 16 Period 46. Teaching date: November 28th, 2011. Unit 8:COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Parts of lesson : Getting started and Listen and read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the city life and the country life . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : a relative, peaceful, permanently,accessible, medical facilities . 2.Grammar: The present progressive tense. C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette,chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check up (5’)Comple the sentences. 1.She / work /company / 1990. 2.We / attend / English course / three years. - Ss write on board. - T gets feedback and marks. II / Warm up : ( 2’) Chatting - Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the country by asking some questions 1. Where do you live ? 2. Do you want to live in the city ? Why ? 3. Do you want to live in the country ? Why ? => Leads in the new lesson III / Presentation : ( 15’) - Introduce the topic of the passage reading : “ Na and Hoa are talking about life in the city and life in the country” - Gets Ss to talk about city life and country life . The words in the box of getting started may help you ..

(88) city life. country life.  Possible answers : - tall buildings - beautiful views - plenty kinds of goods - fresh food - polluted air - fresh air - traffic jams - friendly - entertainment - peaceful - busy - T presents some new words - a relative = uncles , aunts cousins - peaceful = quiet and calm (a) - permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time - accessible (n) - medical facilities (n) - From the reading text ,T helps ss to know more about The present progressive tense- use to talk about the future,to show the changes with Get. Ex: + My parents are buying me a bike for my birthday. + Many remote areas are getting electricity. - T helps ss to give the form. S + TOBE + Ving……. * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember IV/Practice : (15’) 1. True / false statements Statements True False 1. Na lives in the city x 2. Na went to a village which has some x relatives lives there . 3. The village is very peaceful and quiet x 4. Hoa prefers the city life x - Turns on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to predict the true / false statements . - Calls on some Ss to report their predictions and write them on the board. - Asks Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and compare their ideas - Gives feedback and gets more information - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogue 2. Comprehension questions : - Gets Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in ex 2 / 73 - Calls on some pairs to practice asking answering the questions in front of class . - Gives feedback a. Na has been to Kin Lien village b. She was there for the weekend c. to her , the countryside is peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to do ..

(89) d. There is no libraries , no movies , no supermarket , no zoos … e. Country life is becoming better . Many remote area are getting electricity . People can now have things like refrigerators and TV , medical facilities are more accessible . - Asks Ss to work in closed pairs IV / Production : (5’) - Divides the class into 4 groups . Two groups include Ss who prefer the city life and the others include Ss who prefer the country life . - Asks Ss to work in groups to answer the questions “ Do you prefer the city or the country life ?Why ? “ - Calls on 4 pioneers from 4 groups to show their ideas before class . V.Consolidation: (2’) - Asks ss to retell the usage of present progressive tense to talk about the future and to show the changes with Get. VI / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Learn by heart new words and copy two lines for each word 2. Copy the answers in their notebooks . 3. Prepare the next lesson Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: November 29th, 2011. Week 16 Period 47. Unit 8:COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Parts of lesson : Speak + Listen A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - practice speaking about the changes of a place. - able to complete the dialogue by listening . - revision of how to make a phone call. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: The present progressive tense. C/ Teaching aids : textbooks , pictures , poste, cassette. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check up (5’)Ss write the words that they have learnt last period. - T gets feedback and marks II/ Speaking 1.Pre - speaking : ( 5’) Word square. - Asks Ss to find out 7 adjectives E O U I Y S U. X A B C L M O. P M O D E R N. E D I R T Y O. N N S T L H I. S U V R L G S. I V E A Y. B E A U T I F.

(90) B P T F D E L U - Asks Ss to work in 2 teams - Asks Ss to go to the board and circle the word they find - The team which circles more words will win the game . Modern – dirty – busy – noisy – tall – expensive – beautiful  Setting the scene “ Hoa,s grand father is 78 “ - Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger than she is now . - Asks Ss to make a sentence about her health => Hoa,s grand father is getting weaker + Form : am / is / are + V-ing + Use : used to describe changes with get and become 2 / While – speaking : (10’) - Asks Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk to their partners about the changes of the town . The words in the box under the pictures may help you - Writes the word prompts on the board so that Ss can speak easily - traffic - > busy - sky -> cloudy - houses -> high - city -> beautiful - trees - > green - Gets Ss to work in pairs - Monitors and helps Ss speak * Possible answers : - The traffic is getting busier . - There are more tall buildings and houses . - The houses are getting more modern - The town is becoming more beautiful . - The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier 3/ Post - speaking : (5’) - Asks Ss to work in groups and talk about changes in their hometown / neighborhood . - Calls on volunteer from each group to show their ideas before the class . Other groups can add in their ideas . II / Listening: 1. Pre - listening : ( 4’) - Sets the scene “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the phone . She is coming to visit Lan in Hanoi “ - Asks Ss to predict information in the dialogue . - Calls on some Ss to report their predictions 2 / While - listening : ( 10’) - Turns on the tape and check their predictions - Lets them listen twice and find out the missing words individually . - Asks Ss to share their answers with their partners - Calls some Ss to read their results -Gives feedback 1. that 2. this 3. It is 4. where 5. from 6. coming 7. next week 8. arriving 9. Thursday 10 . late 11. afternoon 12 . speak 13. my 14 . get her 3 / Post - listening : (4’) - T asks ss to retell the way to make the phone call. - T asks Ss to play the roles of Lan and Aunt Hang to practice the dialogue . - T- ss get feedback..

(91) III.Consolidation: (1’) - Ss retell the usage and the form of The present progressive tense. VI / Homework : (1’) Write some sentences , using Present Progressive Tense to describe changes in their school Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 16 Period 48. Teaching date: December 2nd, 2011 Unit 8:COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Parts of lesson : Read + The fifteen-minute test. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - understand the text about one of the social problems. - know some new words. - develop ss reading skill. - review Ss some grammar points and vocabularies that they have learnt by doing the fifteen –minute test . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : - rural, urban, strain, typhoon, drought,to struggle, migrant, to increase . 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Text book , cards. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Jumbled words - Write the words with disordered letters on the board . + Fulentipl -> plentiful + taneru -> nature + loofd -> flood + roestdy -> destroy + viroped -> provide + suertl -> result + ciliestial -> facilities - Asks them to write the correct words on the board and repeat chorally , individually => Lead in the new lesson . II / Presentation : (10’) - Introduces the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss . - rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside - urban ( adj ) >< rural - strain (n) = su qua tai ( dan so ) - typhoon (n) = storm (n) - drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time - to struggle (v) - migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place to another especially in order to find work . - to increase (v) - T helps ss to guess the meaning of new words . - Ss repeat chorally , individually * Checking vocabulary : What and where - Asks Ss to think of the difficulties of farmers,life Possible answers :.

(92) droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations / lack of clean water / electricity / insects destroy harvests ... difficulties of farmers,life. - Asks Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers deal with difficulties - Calls on some Ss to report their predictions and write them on the board III / Practice : ( 10’) - Lets Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to check their predictions . - Answer “ What do many farmers do to solve their problem ? “ => They have to move to the city so that they can get well – paid jobs . - Calls on some Ss to read the text in front of class . 1. Gap- filling : - Asks Ss to work in pairs o complete summary , using the information from the passage . - Calls on some volunteers to report their results - Gives feedback 1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural 5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals 9. problem 10 . world - Call on some Ss to read the complete passage aloud 2. Finding the words - Asks Ss to read the text again and work with their partners - Calls them to report their results - Gives feedback a. rural b. plentiful c. increase d. strain e. tragedy f. urban IV / Production : (4’) Discussion - Gives a situation : If you were a Minister , what would you do for farmers ? - Asks Ss to work in groups to discuss * Suggested answers : - build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside - build schools , hospitals - provide clean water , electricity , facilities - build factory . - Calls on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas before the class . V.The fifteen minute test: (15’) ĐỀ A I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1. I have .................. her since yesterday. A. saw B. seeing C. seen D. see 2. My mother has worked …………….20 years. A. on B. between C. for D. since 3. Hoa’s bag is ......................from Nga’s bag. A. differ B. different C. difference D. differential 4. The toy cat is more.........................than the toy dog. A. long B. expensive C. cheap D. large.

(93) 5. Have you seen the new..............................of painting at Tu Do Gallery? A. exhibition B. mall C. area D. products 6. Na’s bag is the same ...............Lan’s bag. A. as B. so C. like D. from 7. I want to send this postcard by................................. A. airman B. air C. mail D. airmail 8. Have you eaten chicken? A. Yes, there is B. Yes, I have C. Yes, I am D. Yes, it is 9. Mai is taller..........................Minh. A. the B. those C. than D. that 10. He often gets up ...............6 o’clock ...............the morning. A. from/in B. in /on C. at / on D. at / in 11. Hoa’s father used to ................in Pleiku. A. live B.living C.lived D. to live 12. The countryside is very quiet and ........................... A.peace B.peaceful C.peaceable D.peacetime II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. He moved into this house last week. He has ………………………………………………………….(present perfect) 2. My bag is different from yours. My bag is not.……………………………………….……….....….( the same as) ĐỀ B I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1. I have .................. her since yesterday. A. see B. seen C. seeing D. saw 2. My mother has worked …………….20 years. A. on B. for C. since D. between 3. Hoa’s bag is ......................from Nga’s bag. A. different B. differ C. differential D. difference 4. The toy cat is more.........................than the toy dog. A. large B. long C. cheap D. expensive 5. Have you seen the new..............................of painting at Tu Do Gallery? A. area B. mall C. exhibition D. products 6. Na’s bag is the same ...............Lan’s bag. A. so B. as C. from D. like 7. I want to send this postcard by................................. A. air B. airman C. airmail D. mail 8. Have you eaten chicken? A. Yes, there is B. Yes, I am C. Yes, I have D. Yes, it is 9. Mai is taller..........................Minh. A. than B. those C. that D. the 10. He often gets up ...............6 o’clock ...............the morning. A. at / in B. in /on C. from/in D. at / on 11. Hoa’s father used to ................in Pleiku. A. lived B.live C. to live D. living 12. The countryside is very quiet and ........................... A.peacetime B.peace C.peaceable D.peaceful II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. He moved into this house last week. He has ………………………………………………………….(present perfect).

(94) 2. My bag is different from yours. My bag is not.……………………………………….……….....….( the same as) ANSWER KEYS: ĐỀA I . (0,5m x 12) 1. C 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. A 6. A 7. D 8. B 9. C 10. D 11. A 12. B II. (2ms x 2) 1. He has moved into this house since last week. 2. My bag is not the same as yours. ĐỀB I. (0,5 m x 12)1. B 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. C 6. B 7. C 8. C 9. A 10. A 11. B 12. D II. (2ms x 2) 1. He has moved into this house since last week. 2. My bag is not the same as yours. VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Write 5 things that government should do for the rural areas . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 17 Period 49. Teaching date: December 5th, 2011 Unit 8:COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Parts of lesson : Write. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - write letters to their friends about their neighborhood . - develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Text book , cards. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Revision : (7’) - Asks Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in the correct order . - Prepares 6 cards with 6 outlines on them . - Calls 6 Ss to hold them and stand in a random order - Asks some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct order . - Writes the answer on the board and ask Ss to copy . 1. Heading - Writer,s address - Date - Dear ………... , 2. opening 3. Body 4. closing II / Pre- writing : (10’) - Asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions ..

(95) - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - Gives feedback III / While- writing : (15’) - Asks Ss to write letters to friends about their neighborhood - Lets them write individually . - Has them compare with their partners and corrects if they can . * Suggested letter : ( Writer,s address) ( Date ) Dear ...., I live in ….. , a small town . My family has a large house with four rooms and a small garden . My sister and I share one bedroom . From the bedroom window , I can see a beautiful park with green tress , flowers and a pond . we do not live far form my school so I usually walk there . In my neighborhood , there is a swimming pool and a beautiful park . On the weekend , I often go swimming with my friends . Early in the morning , I always jog with my sister around the park . But the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the public library near my school . There I not only can study and read books but also watch video and learn how to use the computer . Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood ? Is there anything interesting in the place where you live ? Write to me I would like to say goodbye now . I am looking forwards to hearing from you soon . Love , ( Signature ) IV / Post - writing : (12’) Correction - Chooses some letters to correct before class and ask them to read them aloud . V / Homework : (1’) 1. Write their letters on their notebooks 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: December 6th , 2011. Week 17 Period 50. Unit 8:COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Parts of lesson : Language focus A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - use Present progressive - use the comparative and superlative adjectives . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Text book , chalks , boards … D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Matching A 1. play. B a. to Mom. Key 1.b.

(96) 2. do b. table tennis 2.g 3. watch c. a program 3.c 4. go d. a meeting 4.h 5. clean e. my aunt , Mrs Hang 5.f 6. have f. the house 6.d 7. phone g. my homework 7.e 8. speak h. to violin lesson 8.a - Calls 2 volunteers from 2 teams to do the matching II / Practice : (30’) 1. Ex 2 : Asks Ss to use the suitable verbs in the Present Progressive Tense to complete the exercise - Gets Ss to work in pairs - Calls on some pairs to practice the dialogues before class and correct => What tense do we use in 6 dialogues ? What is the form ? Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue . Are they at present or in the future ? Present Progressive Tense is used to talk about the future . 2. Ex 1 : Asks Ss to practice the dialogue as example S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ? S2 : Is that good fortune ? S1 : That is right S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed . S1 : Oh , no ! S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45 - Gives them the shipping information and ask them to make similar dialogues 3. Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe changes with “ get “ and “ become “ * Drill : Prepares six cards of cues a. The boys / get / tall b. The old men / become / weak c. It / become / dark d. The weather / get / cold e. The students / get / better f. The school yard / become / cleaner - Models first two cues , then whole class repeat chorally , then some Ss read out individually - Gives a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in class can remember the structure . 4 . Comparative and superlative adjectives - Reminds Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives * Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object More long adj + than + object * Superlative : The + short adjective - est The most + long adjective * Irregular adjectives good/ well – better – the best bad – worse – the worst many – more – the most little – less – the least Ex 4 : Has Ss work in pairs to make comparisons between the city and the country . Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city - Lets each Student read aloud one of the sentences they have made . - Gives feedback IV / Further practice : (9’) - Asks Ss to read the advertisements then ask them some questions to check their understanding.

(97) + what are advertised ? ( an apartment , a villa and a house ) + How old are they ? ( The apartment is 2 years old , the villa is 5 years old and the house is new ) + How much do we pay per month ? ( 900,000 dongs for the apartment , 6,6 million dongs for the house and 7,8 million dongs for the villa ) - Game “ Nought and Crosses “ , using comparative and superlative adjectives old expensive big expensive small hot big beautiful old Eg : - The villa is older than the apartment - The house is more expensive than the apartment V / Homework : (1’) 1/Redo all the exercises and copy down 2/ Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 17 Period 51. Teaching date: December 9th , 2011. Consolidation A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : Chatting about daily routine II / Consolidation : Activity 1(20’) 1. Grammar - Asks Ss to repeat the tenses they have learnt in the first semester and write on the board 1.1 The tenses : - Present Simple / - Past simple - Present progressive / - Present perfect - Simple future 1.2 The form of the verbs - Modal verbs : can , could , may might - Gerund ( V- ing ) => used after some verbs such as like / dislike / hate / love / enjoy and prepositions - Has Ss to repeat and copy , then give examples with each one . 2. Exercises : - Using the posters with some exercises to show . 2.1 Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets + Ex 7/ 43 ( workbook ) : Infinitive or Gerund + Ex 5 / 46 ( workbook ) : Past simple or Present perfect - Ask Ss to work in pairs.

(98) - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of lass - Asks some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board - Gives feedback Activity 2: (20’) 1. Grammar 1.2 Comparison - Comparative - Superlative - Like - (not) as …….. as - (not) the same as - different form 1.2 Direct and indirect speech - Commands - Requests - Advice => S + told + O +(not) to + V ….. 2. Exercises : - Ex 7 / 48 ( workbook ) : Comparison - Ex 3 / 33 ( workbook ) / Ex 6/ 51 ( workbook ) + Has Ss work in pairs to do all the exercises + Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class + Gives feedback  Homework : (5’) 1. Redo all the exercises and copy 2. Prepare the test : - Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets . - Complete the conversation - Read the passage carefully , then answer the questions below - Supply the correct tense form of the verb in the brackets - Listening comprehension Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: December 9th , 2011. Week 18 Period 52. Consolidation A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : Chatting about daily routine II / Consolidation :.

(99) Activity 1(20’) 1. Grammar - Asks Ss to repeat the tenses they have learnt in the first semester and write on the board 1.1 The tenses : - Present Simple / - Past simple - Present progressive / - Present perfect - Simple future 1.2 The form of the verbs - Modal verbs : can , could , may might - Gerund ( V- ing ) => used after some verbs such as like / dislike / hate / love / enjoy and prepositions - Has Ss to repeat and copy , then give examples with each one . 2. Exercises : - Using the posters with some exercises to show . 2.1 Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets + Ex 7/ 43 ( workbook ) : Infinitive or Gerund + Ex 5 / 46 ( workbook ) : Past simple or Present perfect - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of lass - Asks some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board - Gives feedback Activity 2: (20’) 1. Grammar 1.2 Comparison - Comparative - Superlative - Like - (not) as …….. as - (not) the same as - different form 1.2 Direct and indirect speech - Commands - Requests - Advice => S + told + O +(not) to + V ….. 2. Exercises : - Ex 7 / 48 ( workbook ) : Comparison - Ex 3 / 33 ( workbook ) / Ex 6/ 51 ( workbook ) + Has Ss work in pairs to do all the exercises + Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class + Gives feedback  Homework : (5’) 1. Redo all the exercises and copy 2. Prepare the test : - Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets . - Complete the conversation - Read the passage carefully , then answer the questions below - Supply the correct tense form of the verb in the brackets - Listening comprehension Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................................

(100) Week 18 Period 53. Teaching date: December 9th , 2011. Consolidation A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : board. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets : (10’) - Asks Ss to work in pairs - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of lass - Asks some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board - Gives feedback 1 . We must be there( at /before/ between /after )7. 30 and 8 . 15 2. Vietnamese language is different ( as/like / from /with ) English language . 3. She told me ( giving / to give /gave ) you this present . 4. Jane is( as/ like /the most / more ) beautiful than her sister .) 5 . Mary likes( playing/ plays /played /play )the piano . 6. When my uncle was young , he used ( go/ went /going/ to go ) fishing on Sundays 7. He ( left / has left / leaves ) London two years ago . 8. I have known her ( since / for / at / in ) three years . - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of lass - Asks some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board - Gives feedback II / Complete the conversation : ( 10’) A : Can I help you ? B : I would like …to send…… this parcel to Hanoi A : Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? B : I am not sure . …How much …….. is airmail ? A : I will have …weigh…….. the parcel first . Well , two kilograms . That will be 9,000 dong B : That is not very cheap . But …I will send …………..it airmail . A : All right . - Asks some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board. - Gives feedback . - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. III / Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in the brackets : (9’) 1. They ( live ) have lived…………... in Hanoi for 20 years . 2. My aunt ( not go ) ……hasn’t gone….. out of her house since she ( buy )……bought…. a color TV 3. The film ( begin ) ……will begin………..at 7. 30 pm tonight . 4.She………is working….(work)on the farm at the present. IV/ Read the passage carefully . Then answer the questions below : (board)(13’) Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand that has a wonderful night market . In the evening , the main street is lined with small stands and shops that sell almost anything you can imagine . Some stands sell jewelry or.

(101) clothing , others sell traditional Thai crafts and still others sell fresh fruit and species . It is easy to spend an entire evening just looking at everything . If you decide to buy something , you will not be disappointed The prices are very reasonable . There are a lot of wonderful attractions in Chiang Mai , but the night market is a favorite for many people . - T helps Ss to know the meaning of some words. + craft(n) +stand(n) +reasonable(adj) - T helps Ss to pronounce words. 1. Where is Chiang Mai ? Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand 2. What is Chiang Mai famous for ? Chiang Mai is famous for a wonderful night market. 3. What can you buy in some stands in Chiang Mai ? We can buy anything in some stands in Chiang Mai. 4. Are the prices expensive ? No,they aren’t. - Asks some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board - Gives feedback  Homework : (3’) 1. Redo all the exercises and copy 2. Prepare the test : Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 18 Period 54. Teaching date: December 9th , 2011. The first semester test A / Aims and Objectives : Students will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt to do the test well B / Teaching aids : Test paper , chalk , board ….. C / Test - Deliver the test paper to students THE FIRST – SEMESTER EXAMINATION Subject: English(ĐỀ A) Duration : 45 minutes A. PRONUNCIATION (1m) I. Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others .(0,5m) (Chọn từ có phần được gạch chân phát âm khác với từ còn lại trong nhóm) 1. a. comment b. comfort c. product d. contact 2. a. resident b. selection c. discount d. serve II. Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others.(0.5m) (Chọn từ có trọng âm khác với từ còn lại trong nhóm) 1. a. facility b. parcel c. resident d. citizenship 2 a. accessible b. typhoon c. selection d. pronunciation.

(102) B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR( 3ms) Choose the word or phrase that best fits the blank space in each sentence by circling A, B, C or D : (Chọn đáp án đúng bằng cách khoanh tròn A, B, C hoặc D) 1. The children are old enough to look after................. a. themselves b. ourselves c. herself d. for themselve 2. We ought.............. the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed a. put b. putting c. to put d. puts 3. What are you doing? - I …….. for club activities. a. am enrolling b. is enrolling c. are enrolling d. enrolling 4. I have lived in Kbang ………….10 years. a. to b. on c. for d. since 5. Lan: “ Do you need any help?” Mai: “...........................................” a. I’m sorry. b.Yes.That’s very kind of you . c. Thank you d. I’m fine.Thanks. 6. I ………. on a farm when I was a young boy. a. used to lived b. used to living c. used to live d. to use 7. ………… sing for peace. a. Let's b. Let c. Let's us d. Let is 8. You should spend more time on Spanish....................... a. pronounce b. pronunciation c. pronoun d. pronounceable 9. There was no ………….so we had to do everything in the dark. a. electric b. electricity c. electrical d. electrician 10. Please take this form to the teacher and ask him to …………. it. a. signature b. sign c. signal d. sight 11. I didn’t go to school....................I was sick. a. but b. because c. so d. until 12. Ba always gets excellent grades because he studies…………….. a. slowly b. softly c.badly d. hard C. READING (3ms) I. Choose the best answer: (1m) In British schools, there are lessons in the morning and in the afternoon. Many children eat lunch at school. In this school, there are two kinds of soup and three main courses. There are also two desserts and a selection of drinks. The food on this menu is very healthy. There is salad and there are vegetables. There aren’t chips or crisps. And there isn’t any is cream or chocolate! Some children in British schools do not eat pork, and some children do not eat any meat. These children choose a vegetarian meal. Today there is vegetarian pile or salad for these children. 1. Where do British majority students have lunch? A. At home. B. In classes. 2. What is the food in this school like? A. It’s delicious. B. It’s healthy 3. What does the word “healthy” in line 5 mean?. C. At school. C. It’s expensive. D. No information. D. It’s cheap.

(103) A. not often ill B. showing good health C. good for your health D. normal 4. Why do these children choose a vegetarian meal? A. Because meat is expensive B. Because they are vegetarians C. Because they do not eat pork D. Because meat is not good for their heath. II. Read the passage carefully then answer the questions: (2ms) (Đọc đoạn văn thật kĩ và trả lời câu hỏi) 5. How many main dishes are there? ......................................................................................................................................................... 6. Is the passsage talking about British schools? .............................................................................................................................................................. D. Writing: (2ms)(Viết lại câu tương tự) 1. Hai said to Ha : “ Can you give Hoa this pencil ?” Hai asked Ha……………………………………………………………...……………(Câu tường thuật) 2. Minh is 10 years old. He can’t drive a car. Minh is not ……………………………………………………..…………(Adj /Adv enough+ to V bare) 3. The red dress is more expensive than blue one. The red dress is not ……….…………....……………………………………….…( ...As + Adj +as...) 4. Don’t watch T.V late every night. You shouldn’t ………………………………………………………………..…………(câu khuyên bảo) E. LISTENING(1m) Listen and choose the right answer: (Nghe và chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất) 1. Peter is …………….years old. a. 13 b. 14 c. 15 d. 16 2. He has lived in London for ……………………years. a. 10 b. 11 c. 12 d. 13 3.He loves learning…………………in his free time. a. English b. Japanese c. Vietnamese d. Chinese 4.He often practices……………………………………………… a. writing letters in Vietnamese b. writing letters in Japanese c. writing letters in Chinese d. writing letters in English ***GOOD LUCK*** THE FIRST – SEMESTER EXAMINATION Subject: English(ĐỀ B) Duration : 45 minutes A. PRONUNCIATION (1m) I. Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others .(0,5m) (Chọn từ có phần được gạch chân phát âm khác với từ còn lại trong nhóm) 1. a. character b. orphanage c. message d. transmit 2. a. equipment b. enroll c. recycle d. serve II. Circle the word which has the different stressed syllable with the others.(0.5m) (Chọn từ có trọng âm khác với từ còn lại trong nhóm) 1. a. satisfactory b. stationery c. wardrobe d. orphanage 2 a. experiment b. directory c. behavior d. tragedy B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR( 3ms) Choose the word or phrase that best fits the blank space in each sentence by circling A, B, C.

(104) or D : (Chọn đáp án đúng bằng cách khoanh tròn A, B, C hoặc D) 1. The children are old enough to look after................. a. for themselves b. ourselves c. herself 2. We ought.............. the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed a. puts b. to put c. putting 3. What are you doing? - I …….. for club activities. a. are enrolling b. am enrolling c. enrolling 4. I have lived in Kbang ………….10 years. a.on b. to c. since 5. Lan: “ Do you need any help?” Mai: “...........................................” a. I’m sorry. b. I’m fine.Thanks. c. Thank you. d. Yes.That’s very kind of you . 6. I ………. on a farm when I was a young boy. a. used to living b. used to lived c. used to live 7. …………...... sing for peace. a. Let b. Let’s c. Let is 8. You should spend more time on Spanish....................... a. pronounce b. pronounceable c. pronoun 9. There was no ………….so we had to do everything in the dark. a. electricity b. electric c. electrician 10. Please take this form to the teacher and ask him to …………. it. a. sign b. signal c. signature 11. I didn’t go to school....................I was sick. a. but b. until c. so 12. Ba always gets excellent grades because he studies…………….. a. badly b. softly c. hard. d. themselves d. put d. is enrolling d. for. d. to use d. Let’s us d. pronunciation d. electrical d. sight d. because d. slowly. C. READING (3ms) I. Choose the best answer: (1m) In British schools, there are lessons in the morning and in the afternoon. Many children eat lunch at school. In this school, there are two kinds of soup and three main courses. There are also two desserts and a selection of drinks. The food on this menu is very healthy. There is salad and there are vegetables. There aren’t chips or crisps. And there isn’t any is cream or chocolate! Some children in British schools do not eat pork, and some children do not eat any meat. These children choose a vegetarian meal. Today there is vegetarian pile or salad for these children. 1. Where do British majority students have lunch? A. At home. B. In classes. 2. What is the food in this school like? A. It’s delicious. B. It’s healthy 3. What does the word “healthy” in line 5 mean?. C. At school. C. It’s expensive. D. No information. D. It’s cheap.

(105) A. not often ill B. showing good health C. good for your health D. normal 4.Why do these children choose a vegetarian meal? A. Because meat is expensive B. Because they are vegetarians C. Because they do not eat pork D. Because meat is not good for their heath. II. Read the passage carefully then answer the questions: (2ms) ( Đọc đoạn văn thật kĩ và trả lời câu hỏi) 5. How many main dishes are there? ......................................................................................................................................................... 6. Is the passsage talking about British schools? .............................................................................................................................................................. D. Writing: (2ms)(Viết lại câu tương tự) 1. Hai said to Ha : “ Can you give Hoa this pencil ?” Hai asked Ha……………………………………………………………………………(Câu tường thuật) 2. Minh is 10 years old. He can’t drive a car. Minh is not ……………………………………………………..…………(Adj /Adv enough+ to V bare) 3. The red dress is more expensive than blue one. The red dress is not ……………………………………………………………….…( ...As + Adj +as...) 4. Don’t watch T.V late every night. You shouldn’t …………………………………………………………………………(câu khuyên bảo) E. LISTENING(1m) Listen and choose the right answer: (Nghe và chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất) 1. Peter is …………….years old. a. 15 b. 14 c. 13 d. 16 2. He has lived in London for ……………………years. a. 11 b. 10 c. 13 d. 12 3. He loves learning…………………in his free time. a. Japanese b. Chinese c. Vietnamese d. English 4. He often practices……………………………………………… a. writing letters in Vietnamese b. writing letters in English c. writing letters in Chinese d. writing letters in Japanese ***GOOD LUCK*** MA TRẬN Nhận biết TN TL. Chủ đề I.Phonetics + Vowel sound + stressed syllable. 4. Vân dụng TN TL. Tổng 4. 1 10. II.Lexico and grammar + Language functions + prepositions of time + reported speech + reflexive pronouns. Thông hiểu TN TL. 1 2. 2,5. 12 3 0,5.

(106) + adverbs of manner + Let’s + V bare + present perfect with since and for + present continuous + Used to + V bare III. Reading + A text about British schools. 3. 3 1,5. 3. 1,5. IV. Writing + Reported speech +Adj/Adv Enough + to V bare +... As + Adj +as..... + Should / shouldn’t V. Listening +Unit 5: Study habits Tổng. 6. 4. 4 2. 4. 2 4. 1 17. 1. 9 5. 4 3. 30 2. 10. ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề THI HỌC KỲ I MÔN ANH VĂN LỚP 8( 2011-1012) ĐỀA A. PRONUNCIATION (1m) I . (0,25mx2) 1.b 2.a II. (0,25mx2) 1.a 2.d B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR( 3ms) (0,25mx12)1.a 2. c 3.a 4.c 5.b 6.c 7.a 8.b 9.b 10.b 11.b 12.d C. READING (3ms) I. Choose the best answer: (1m) (0,25 x 4)1.B 2.C 3.B 4.C II. Answer the question: ( 1m x 2) 5. There are three main dishes . 6. Yes, it is. D. Writing: (0,5m x 4): 1. Hai asked Ha to give Hoa this pencil. 2. Minh is not old enough to drive a car. 3. The red dress is not as cheap as blue one/the blue dress. 4. You shouldn’t watch T.V late every night. E. Listen and choose the right answer: ( 0,25m x 4 )1c 2a 3c 4b Peter is my pen pal . He is fifteen years old . He lives in a house in London . He has lived there for ten years . He is an excellent student . He always works hard at school and get good marks . He loves learning Vietnamese in his free time . He often practices writing letters in Vietnamese . Sometimes he helps me to correct his spelling mistakes . Next summer he is going to visit HCM City with his family . I'm expecting to see him . ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề THI HỌC KỲ I MÔN ANH VĂN LỚP 8( 2011-1012) ĐỀB A. PRONUNCIATION (1m) I . (0,25mx2) 1.d 2.d.

(107) II. (0,25mx2) 1.a 2.d B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR( 3ms) (0,25mx12)1.d 2. b 3.b 4.d 5.d 6.c 7.b 8.d 9.a 10.a 11.d 12.c C. READING (3ms) I. Choose the best answer: (1m) (0,25 x 4)1.B 2.C 3.B 4.C II. .Answer the question: ( 1m x 2) 5. There are three main dishes . 6. Yes, it is. D. A.Sentences transformation: (0,5m x 4): 1. Linh asked Nhi to give Mai this mobine phone. 2. Lien is not old enough to ride a horse. 3. The toy cat is not as cheap as the toy dog 4. You shouldn’t stay up late every night. E. Listen and choose the right answer: ( 0,25m x 4 )1a 2b 3c 4d Peter is my pen pal . He is fifteen years old . He lives in a house in London . He has lived there for ten years . He is an excellent student . He always works hard at school and get good marks . He loves learning Vietnamese in his free time . He often practices writing letters in Vietnamese . Sometimes he helps me to correct his spelling mistakes . Next summer he is going to visit HCM City with his family . I expect to see him . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 19. Teaching date: December 9th , 2011. CORECTING THE FIRST SEMESTER TEST A / Aims and Objectives : Students will be able to + find the mistakes they got in the test + summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt B / Teaching aids : Test paper , chalk , board ….. C / Procedure: - T returns the test to ss. - T corrects the test and points the mistakes that ss got in the test out. ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề THI HỌC KỲ I MÔN ANH VĂN LỚP 8( 2011-1012) ĐỀA A. PRONUNCIATION (1m) I . (0,25mx2) 1.b 2.a II. (0,25mx2) 1.a 2.d B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR( 3ms) (0,25mx12)1.a 2. c 3.a 4.c 5.b 6.c 7.a 8.b C. READING (3ms) I. Choose the best answer: (1m) (0,25 x 4)1.B 2.C 3.B 4.C II. Answer the question: ( 1m x 2) 5. There are three main dishes . 6. Yes, it is.. 9.b. 10.b. 11.b. 12.d.

(108) D. Writing: (0,5m x 4): 1. Hai asked Ha to give Hoa this pencil. 2. Minh is not old enough to drive a car. 3. The red dress is not as cheap as blue one/the blue dress. 4. You shouldn’t watch T.V late every night. E. Listen and choose the right answer: ( 0,25m x 4 )1c 2a 3c 4b Peter is my pen pal . He is fifteen years old . He lives in a house in London . He has lived there for ten years . He is an excellent student . He always works hard at school and get good marks . He loves learning Vietnamese in his free time . He often practices writing letters in Vietnamese . Sometimes he helps me to correct his spelling mistakes . Next summer he is going to visit HCM City with his family . I'm expecting to see him . ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề THI HỌC KỲ I MÔN ANH VĂN LỚP 8( 2011-1012) ĐỀB A. PRONUNCIATION (1m) I . (0,25mx2) 1.d 2.d II. (0,25mx2) 1.a 2.d B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR( 3ms) (0,25mx12)1.d 2. b 3.b 4.d 5.d 6.c 7.b 8.d 9.a 10.a 11.d 12.c C. READING (3ms) I. Choose the best answer: (1m) (0,25 x 4)1.B 2.C 3.B 4.C II. .Answer the question: ( 1m x 2) 5. There are three main dishes . 6. Yes, it is. D. A.Sentences transformation: (0,5m x 4): 1. Linh asked Nhi to give Mai this mobine phone. 2. Lien is not old enough to ride a horse. 3. The toy cat is not as cheap as the toy dog 4. You shouldn’t stay up late every night. E. Listen and choose the right answer: ( 0,25m x 4 )1a 2b 3c 4d Peter is my pen pal . He is fifteen years old . He lives in a house in London . He has lived there for ten years . He is an excellent student . He always works hard at school and get good marks . He loves learning Vietnamese in his free time . He often practices writing letters in Vietnamese . Sometimes he helps me to correct his spelling mistakes . Next summer he is going to visit HCM City with his family . I expect to see him .. - T asks ss to do some exercises that helps them improve their knowledge in English. I. Combine 2 sentences into one, using the structure S+ V/ tobe +Adj /Adv enough+ to V bare. 1. My sister is old. She can drive a car. 2. The radio isn’t small. You can’t put it in your pocket. 3. This coat isn’t warm. I don’t wear it in winter. 4. She is beautiful and intelligent. She can become Miss World. 5. The weather was fine. We could go camping. Keys: 1. My sister is old enough to play volleyball. 2. The radio isn’t small enough for you to put in your pocket. 3. This coat isn’t warm enough for me to wear in winter. 4. She is beautiful and intelligent enough to become Miss World. 5. The weather was fine enough for us to go camping..

(109) II.Change the sentences into reported speech. 1. “Mr.Brown told Ann, 'Please give me some food!' Mr. Brown asked............................................................................................ 2. I said to her, 'Don't make noise in class!' I told................................................................................................................ 3. Peter said 'Can you help me, Juan?" Peter asked Juan.............................................................................................. 4. She told him "Don't swim the in sea!" She................................................................................................................... 5. The tiger said to the farmer "Show me your wisdom!" The tiger asked................................................................................................. Keys:. .. 1. Mr Brown asked Ann to give him some food 2. I told her not to make noise in class 3. Peter asked Juan to help him 4. She told him not to swim in the sea 5. The tiger asked the farmer to show him his wisdom. - SS go to the board and do the exercise. - T- ss get feedback. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 19. Teaching date: December th , 2011. Hệ thống kiến thức học kỳ I A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I. SIMPLE TENSE: Put the verds in brackets into the simple present tense. 1. She______(not drink)coffee. She ____(drink) Coca Cola. 2. It_____(be)often hot in the summer. 3. What _____you_____(do) every evening? 4. The earth_____(circle)the sun once every 365days. 5. I_____(see)her very often. 6. Most rivers_____(flow)into the sea. 7. Vegetarians_____(not eat) meat. 8. Bees_____(make)honey. 9. Rice_____(not grow)in cold climates. 10. Where _____martin_____(come)from? -He(be)_____Scottish. Keys : 1.doesn’t drink/drinks. 2.is 3.do/do 7.don’t eat 8.make 9.doesn’t grow II. SIMPLE FUTURE: Use be going to with the verbs in brackets.. 4.circles 5.see 6.flow 10. does/come/is.

(110) 1. I(not have)breakfast this morning.T’m not hungry. 2. Look out!She (fall)off the rail. 3. Where we (spend) the night tonight? 4. My friends (get)married in August this year. 5. Look!the ambulance is coming.I (wave) to the driver 6. You (invite) the newcomer of our class to your party? 7. My hair is dirty.I (wash) it. 8. We feel tired.We(lie) down for some sleep. 9. Roger and his friends (wash) their cars after work. 10. My mother (feed)the dog this evening. Keys : 1. am not going to have. 2. is going to full. 3. are we going to spend. 4. are going to get. 5. am going to wave. 6. are going to invite. 7. am going to wash. 8. are going to lie. 9. are going to wash 10. is going to feed III. SIMPLE PAST: Put the verd in the correct form. 1. Yesterday, I (go)______ to the restaurant with a client. 2. We (drive) ______ around the parking lot for 20 mins to find a parking space. 3. When we (arrive) ______ at the restaurant, the place (be) ______ full. 4. The waitress (ask) ______ us if we (have) reservations. 5. I (say) , "No, my secretary forgets to make them." 6. The waitress (tell)______ us to come back in two hours. 7. My client and I slowly (walk) ______ back to the car. 8. Then we (see) ______ a small grocery store. 9. We (stop) in the grocery store and (buy) ______ some sandwiches. 10. That (be) ______ better than waiting for two hours. Keys: .Put the verd in the correct form. 1. went 2. drove 3. arrived / was 4. asked / had 5. said 6. told 7. walked 8. saw 9. stopped / bought 10. was Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 19. Teaching date: December th , 2011. Hệ thống kiến thức học kỳ I A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they are short of . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids :.

(111) D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I. MODAL VERBS: In the following situations, use the cues given and the words in brackets to write comlete sentences. 1. I don’t understand the lesson. pay/attention/what/teacher/say (ought to) 2. He doesn’t understand the problem.speak/him/it/today (have to) 3. I’m not good at English.spend/time/English (must) 4. I need some stamps. go/post office/buy (have to) 5. The child is crying. stay/there/him (must) 6. I can’t phone Mary.write/her/letter (ought to) 7. I usually get bad marks.study/harder (must) 8. She has nothing to eat. buy / mar ket (can) 9. Her head is hurt. See / doctor( should) 10. My pen is broken./ buy / new pen (should) Answer keys: 1. You ought to pay more attention to what the teacher says 2. You have to speak to him about it today 3.You must spend more time on your English 4.You have to go to the post office to buy them 5.You must stay there with him 1. You ought to write her a letter 2. You must study harder 3. She can buy something at the market to eat. 4. She should see a doctor. 5. You should buy a new pen . II. WHY- BECAUSE: Make sentences with WHY and answer with BECAUSE, using the given words. 1.Why / not / go / zoo/ yesterday? I / do /homework. 2.Why / mustn’t / let / children / play/ kitchen? Kitchen / dangerous/ place. 3.Why/ she / buy / new car? Her / old car / broken. 4.Why/ teacher / sad? Brother /just/ died 5. Why / should / Hoa / wear / warm clothes? She / ill KEYS: 1.Why don’t you go to the zoo yesterday? Because I must do my homework. 2.Why mustn’t we let children play in the kitchen? Because the kitchen is a dangerous place. 3.Why does she buy a new car? Because her old car is broken down. 4.Why is our teacher sad? Because her brother has just died. 5. Why should Hoa wear the warm clothes? Because she is ill III.PRESENT PERFECT : Give the verbs in present perfect 1. We (study) a very hard lesson for 3 hours.................................................................................... 2. I (read) that novel by Hemingway since last week. ..................................................................... 3. We (study) every lesson in this book lately . ............................................................................... 4. My wife and I (travel) to Mexico by air for 2 days. .......................................................................

(112) 5. I (have) a little trouble with my car since last week. ..................................................................... 6. What you (do) for 2 hours ago? ..................................................................................................... 7. How long you (learn) English? ....................................................................................................... 8. Tom (never be) in Hanoi. ............................................................................................................... 9. The plane (never stop) at a small town . ........................................................................................ Keys: 1. We have studied a very hard lesson for 3 hours. 2. I have read that novel by Hemingway since last week. 3. We have studied every lesson in this book lately . 4. My wife and I have traveled to Mexico by air for 2 days. 5. I have had a little trouble with my car since last week. 6. What have you done for 2 hours ago? 7. How long have you learnt English? 8. Tom has never been in Hanoi. 9. The plane has never stopped at a small town . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Unit 9: A FIRST- AID COURSE I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be helped + To make and respond to requests , offers , and promises. + Towrite a thank- you note. + To use “ in order to , so as to “ to indicate purpose , Future simple and Modal “ will “ to make requests , offers and promises . II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassets III. Procedure : Lesson 1. Getting started Listen and read. Practicing the dialogue to to know what they would do in the situations which require first - aid.. Lesson 2. Speak. Making and respond to requests , offers , and promises.. Lesson 3. Listen. Lesson 4. Read. Lesson 5. Write. Lesson 6. Language focus. Week 20 Period 55. Giving students in listening for details about the activities talking place in an emergency room . Reading the text about the instructions about some more situations requiring first – aid. Giving students practice in writing a thank – you note . Giving students further practice in using “ in order to , so as to “ to indicate purpose , Future simple and Modal “ will “ to make requests , offers and promises . Teaching date: December 26th, 2011.

(113) Unit 9: A FIRST- AID COURSE Parts of lesson : Getting started and Listen and read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know what they would do in the situations which require first - aid. - know some neư words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : ambulance, emergence, unconscious, bleed -> the bleeding . 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Text book , cards , cassette D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : ( 7’) Kim,s game ( Getting started ) - Asks Ss to open their books and look at the things on page 80 for 20 seconds . Tell them these things are often used for first - aid - Divides the class into two groups . - Asks Ss to close their books and go t6o the board to write the names of the things they have just seen from memory . - Tells them the group having the most right English words is the winner - Has them open the books again and go through the words in English . Suggested answers : 1. emergency room 2. sterile dressing 3. medicated oil 4. ice 5. water pack 6. alcohol - Lets them discuss and write down what they would do in these situations which require first – aid . - Calls on some groups to give their answers and correct Possible answers : + A girl has a burn on her arm -> Use cold water / ice to ease the pain + A boy has a bad cut on his leg -> Use alcohol / medicated oil / sterile dressing + A girl has a nose bleed -> Use a handkerchief to stop the bleeding / tell her to lie down . + A boy has a bee sting -> Use medicated oil … II/ Presentation : (15’) - Introduces the topic of the passage : A girl student is talking with a nurse on the phone.The nurse is at Bach Mai Hospital.The girl is at Quang Trung school.A student is hurt.She fell off her bike and hit her head on the road. - T presents some new words. - (an) ambulance -> drawing - (an) emergence = cap cuu , tinh trang khan cap - unconscious (adj) >< conscious (adj) - to bleed -> the bleeding -> Asks Ss to copy the vocabulary in their notebooks * Checking technique: Slap the board ( Put the new words in Vietnamese on the board ) * Gap filling Prediction - Hangs the chart with the paragraph on the board . There was an emergency at Lan,s school . A student …..(1)…. off her bike and hit her head on the road . She was …..(2)…. but she cut her head and the …….(3)…. was ……(4)….. badly . Lan telephoned Bach Mai Hospital and asked the nurse to send an ……(5)….. to Quang Trung School . Lan was asked to keep the student …..(6)…. while waiting for the ambulance . - Asks Ss to predict the words in the gaps - Calls on some Ss to go to the board and write their words III / Practice : ( 15’).

(114) - Has Ss open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue , then check their predictions - Gives feedback 1. fell 2. conscious 3. cut 4. bleeding 5. ambulance 6. awake * Comprehension questions - Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and select the topic covered in the dialogue . - Lets Ss work in groups to write their answers on a sheet of paper and hand in after finishing . - Collects Ss , papers and give feedback : a- b- c- e- f IV / Production : ( 7’) 1. Role play - Has Ss in turn play the roles to demonstrate the dialogue . 2. Write - it -up - Asks Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue . - Tells Ss to begin their story with : “ Yesterday there was an emergency at ……. “ - Monitors and helps Ss with their work V / Homework : (1’) 1. Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook (1,2 / 55 ) 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: December 28th, 2011. Week 20 Period 56. Unit 9: A FIRST- AID COURSE Parts of lesson : Speak A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - make and respond to requests , offers , and promises. - develop ss speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: make and respond to requests , offers , and promises. C/ Teaching aids : Text book, pictures , charts and posters D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I /Check-up: (5’) - Ss read the dialogue and write the words that they have learn last period. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II/ Warm up : (5’) Net work. Situations which require first - aid.

(115)  Possible answers : - have a snake bite - have a burn - have a cut - have a bee sting - have a nose bleed ... III / Pre - speaking : (13’) - Introduces the topic of the speaking and some models sentences . 1. Set the scene : - Asks Ss some questions to elicit the models a. I want you to get me a bandage . How can I say ? b. I would like you to come to my party . How can I say ? c. I tell my mother that I will surely finish my work before bedtime . How can I say ? - Has Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on the board ( underline the key words ) a. Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ? b. Would you like to come to my party ? c. I promise I will finish my homework before bedtime . => Concept checking - Gets Ss to work out the rules for themselves by asking questions . - After formulating the model sentences , elicit some more phrases with the same use from students . 1.1 To make a request : Will Would you ( please ) + V ……. ? Could Can Reponses : + Sure / Ok / All right . - I am sorry . I can / I am afraid not 1.2 To make an offer Will / Won,t you Shall I + V ………..? Can I Would you like + to V ………...? What can I do / get for you ? Can I get you ……………..? Responses : + Yes , please . / That would be nice . - No , thank you . 1.3 To make a promise I promise I will / I will not ……….. I will ………... I promise . I promise to …………... Reponses : I hope . / Good . / I am glad . / Do not forget - Asks Ss to copy down . IV / While - speaking : (15’) 1. Matching : - Hangs the chart with the statements on the board . - Asks Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and match the situations with the statements . 1. The girl has a burn on her hand . 2. The girl has a bad fever . 3. The boy has just broken the vase ..

(116) 4. The boy has a headache . 5. The boy has a snake bite . - Give feedback : 1.a 2. d 3. e 4. b 5. c 2. Picture Drill : - Identify the situations in the pictures Picture a) -> request “ b) -> offer / request “ c) -> offer / request “ d) -> offer “ e) -> promise - Asks Ss to work in pairs + Model : Could you give me a bandage , please ? Sure . Here you are - Calls on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges in front of class . V / Post - speaking : (5’) Pair work ( closed pairs ) - Gets Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges - Monitors and corrects , encourages Ss to make sentences for themselves - Collects their ideas and write them on the boards * Suggested answers : b. A : Can I get you some water / medicine ? B : Yes, please . c. A : Can I get you some bandage ? B : That would be nice d. A : You must have a fever . Can I get you some medicine / water ? B : No, I am fine . Thank you . e. A : I promise I will not play soccer in the house again . B : I hope so . VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Do exercise 3, 4/ 56 ( workbook ) 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 20 Period 57. Teaching date: December 30th, 2011 Unit 9 : A FIRST- AID COURSE Parts of lesson : Listen. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know how to listen for details about the activities talking place in an emergency room . - know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : stretcher, crutches, wheelchair, eye chart, paramedic, eyesight, wheel. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , pictures and a chart D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I /Check-up: (5’) - T asks ss to make and respond to requests , offers , and promises..

(117) - T gets feedback and give marks. II / Warm up : (5’)Guess from context . What action ? - Asks Ss to look at the picture and write out all the verbs describing the actions of the people in it . - Tell Ss the group having the most right verbs is the winner . - Gives feedback : to drive , wheel / move / push , weight , wait , lie , stand , lean . = > Leads in the new lesson III / Pre- listening : (12’) - Introduces the topic of the listening and some new words - an eye chart ( using picture ) -> eye sight - a parademic : he takes care of patients but he is not a doctor nor a nurse - a wheelchair ( using the picture ) -> to wheel ( to push a wheel chair ) - a stretcher ( picture ) - a crutch -> crutches ( picture ) -> Has Ss copy * Checking technique : What and where * Matching : - Asks Ss to look at the picture in their books again and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in the box . - Calls on some volunteers from each group to demonstrate in front of class . - Gives feedback A -> ambulance D -> eye chart B -> wheelchair E -> scale C -> crutches F -> stretcher IV / While – listening : (15’) 1. Order Prediction - Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words . - Tells Ss they are going to listen to a paragraph about the activities taking place in an emergency room which contains the words on the board - Put the words in the table Guess key ambulance 3 wheelchair 2 crutches 6 eye chart 4 scale 5 stretcher 1 - Has Ss copy and guess the order of the words - Plays the tape and has Ss to listen - Asks Ss to give their answers and correct 2. True / False statements - Sticks the chart with the statements on the board : 1. A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency room . 2. The patient,s head is bandaged 3. A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient sitting on it . 4. The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the different size . 5. The baby,s mother is trying to stop the nurse from weighing her baby . - Asks Ss to read the statements carefully and check if they understand the meaning of the statements - Has Ss work in pairs to decide which of the statements is true and which is false . - Plays the tape and let Ss listen ( 2 or 3 times ) - Calls on Ss to read their answers and give feedback.

(118) 1. False ( a parademic not a doctor ) 2. True 3. False ( empty wheelchair not with a patient ) 4. True 5 . False ( stop her baby from crying ) V / Post – listening : (7’) Write it up - Has Ss write the story about the activities in the picture , using the Present Continuous . “ This is the emergency room in a large hospital ….. “ VI / Homework : (1’) 1 Let Ss do the exercises ( 3,4 / 56 in the workbook 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 21 Period 58. Teaching date: January 2nd, 2012 Unit 9 : A FIRST- AID COURSE Parts of lesson : Read. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + read for the instructions about some more situations requiring first – aid. + know some new words . + develop ss reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : - to lie flat, to elevate >< to lower, a victim, to overheat, tissue damage, to ease = to stop, fainting, revive. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , chart , picture / drawing , mimes , 4 cardboards . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I /Check-up: (5’) - Ss write the words that they have learn last period. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (5’) - Asks ss to write the words relating to first-aid treatment. - T- ss get feedback. III / Pre – reading : (15’) - Introduces the topic of reading passage and some new words to Ss . “Today we are going to find the way to give first-aid for some cases: Shock, Fainting and Burn.” - T elicits ss some words. * Checking technique : Rub out and remember *Network - Draws the network with some examples on the board - Asks Ss to think of what to do in these emergency cases . - Collects and writes the students, ideas on the board.

(119) burn. fainting. First-aid Shock IV / While – reading : (15’) - Has Ss open their books and read the instructions page 83 - Asks Ss to go to the board and add the missing information . 1. Matching : - Asks Ss to read the statements / page 84 and match tree Leadings A , B , C to them . - Gives feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d 2. Grid - Draws the grid on the board . - Asks Ss to read the instructions again and fill the information . - Calls on some Ss to the board to write their answers - Gives feedback Cases. Do - Leave the patient lying flat . - Elevate the patients, feet or lower his / her head .. Don,t - Do not force him / her to sit or stand .. Fainting Shock. - Give him / her a cup of tea when he / she revives - Do not overheat the victim with . blankets or coat - Do not give the victim any food or drink or drug . - Cool the burn immediately to minimize the tissue damage . - Put the affected part under a running cold tap . - Ease the pain with ice or cold water packs . - Cover the burned area with a thick sterile dressing .. Burns - Has Ss copy the grid in their notebooks . V / Post – reading : (4’) - Asks Ss to work in groups to continue discussing how to give first aid . - Calls on some volunteers from each group to demonstrate in front of class . VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Let Ss do the exercises 6,7 in the workbook . 2. Prepare the next lesson Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................................

(120) Week 21 Period 59. Teaching date: January 4th, 2012 Unit 9: A FIRST-AID COURSE Parts of lesson : Write. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + know how to write a thank – you note . + develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: Simple present tense. C/ Teaching aids : Posters , drawing . D/ Teachnique: eliciting. E / Procedure : I /Check-up: (5’) - Ss write the words that they have learn last period. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (5’) Shark attack ( Revised words : lie flat , elevate , lower , victim , ease )  Lead in the new lesson . III / Pre – writing : (10’) - Introduces the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss 1. Pre- teach vocabulary : - to thank Sb for sth Eg : She thanked me for helping her - to cheer Sb up = to make Sb feel happier - to come over ( translation ) - Has Ss copy * Checking technique : slap the board 2. Set the scene - Asks Ss to close their books and listen “ Nga was sick and she had to go to the hospital . After she left the hospital , she wrote a thank – you note to Hoa . Why and what did she write ? “ 3. True / False Predictions - Hangs the poster with the statements on the board a. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some come candy . b. Hoa,s gift cheered Nga up . c. Nga ,d like Hoa to see her at the hospital . d. Nga is very bored now . e. Nga writes the letter at the hospital . - Asks Ss to read the statements and predict . - Gets Ss to give their predictions and writes them on the board . - Asks Ss to look at the letter and complete it with the right verb forms . - Monitors and helps Ss with the tense forms . - Calls on some Ss to give their answers and give feedback . - Asks Ss to read the whole letter and check if their prediction are right or not . Answer key : 1. False -> flower ( not candy ) 2. True 3. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital ) 4. True.

(121) 5. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital ) IV / While – writing : (14’) Questions and answers - Tells Ss they are going to write a thank – you note to a friend and invite him / her to go on a picnic with them . - Asks Ss to read the questions carefully to answer orally - Has Ss practice speaking to each other . - Monitors and corrects . - Gets Ss to join the sentences into a paragraph to make it a thank – you note . - Tells Ss to write their letters in their exercise notebooks . V / Post – writing : (10’) Exhibition - Divides the class into 4 groups and chooses a letter randomly in each group . - Compares their letters and corrects . - Calls on some more Ss to read their letters for class - Gives feedback and corrects . VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Asks Ss to use the same format to write another letter to another friend for another occasion . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 21 Period 60. Teaching date: January 6th, 2012. Unit 9: A FIRST-AID COURSE Parts of lesson : Language focus A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to use + “ in order to , so as to “ to indicate purpose . + Future simple and Modal “ will “ to make requests , offers and promises . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards … D/ Teachnique: eliciting. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Bingo => lead in the new lesson II / Language focus : 1. Grammar notes : (7’) - Asks Ss to repeat the uses and forms of “ In order to / so as to + V infinitive “ “ Future simple “ and “ Modal Will “ - Summarizes and hangs the charts with models and uses of them . + Negative purposes : In order not to + V / So as not to + V Eg : You have to take your warm clothes with you in order not to get bad cold. - Has Ss copy . 2. Exercises : - Asks Ss to look at the books and do the exercises ..

(122) - Asks ss to do them orally first , then copy them in their exercise notebooks . Ex 1 : Matching (8’) - Asks Ss to read the example aloud and ask them to match one part of a sentence from column A with another part in column B - Gets Ss to exchange their answers to correct for each other . - Calls on some Ss to read their answers and gives feedback 1- f , 2- c , 3- b ,4 – e , 5- a , 6- d Ex 2 : Future simple (7’) - Asks Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue and exchange their roles. - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Gives feedback 1. will 2. will 3. won,t 4. Shall 5. will 6. , ll Ex 3: Making requests , offers and promises with will (10’) - Explains the aims of the exercise - Asks Ss to read each situation and work in pairs to complete the dialogue. - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Gives feedback : a. Will you open the window , please , Nga ? b . will you give it to me , please ? c. Will you answer the telephone , please ? d. Will you turn on the TV , please , Nga ? e. Will you pour a glass of water for me , please ? f. Will you get me a cushion , please ? Ex 4 : Work with a partner (7’) - Explains the aims of the exercise - Asks Ss to read the example aloud . - Gets Ss to read all the words in the box . Be sure Ss to understand the meaning of them and each situation . - Lets Ss work in pairs to make requests , offers or promises - Calls on some pairs to read their answers aloud . - Gives feedback b. Will you paint the door , please ? I will paint the door tomorrow . c . Will you study harder , please ? I will study harder . d. Will you carry the bag for me , please ? Shall I carry the bag for you ? e. Will you hang the washing , please ? Shall I hang the washing for you ? f. Will you cut the grass , please ? I will cut the grass for you . III / Homework : (1’) 1. Lets Ss copy all the exercises in the notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................................... Unit 10: Recycling.

(123) I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be able to + .give and respond to instructions. + talk about feelings. + write a set of instructions.. II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassets III. Procedure : Lesson 1. Getting started Listen and read. Practicing the dialogue to to do something to protect the environment and save natural resources .. Lesson 2. Speak. Practicing giving and responding to instructions .. Lesson 3. Listen. listening for specific information about making compost .. Lesson 4. Read. Lesson 5. Write. Lesson 6. Language focus. Reading the text about the recycling. writing a set of instructions , using the sequencing . Giving students further practice in using form the passive in Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives . Teaching date: January 9th, 2012. Week 22 Period 61. Unit 10: Recycling Parts of lesson : Getting started + Listen and Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + do something to protect the environment and save natural resources . + know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : representative , protect ,natural resource, recycle,contact. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , posters , cassette , 6 flashcards , a chart … D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm up : (5’) Brainstorming (Getting started) Reuse plastic bags. Ways to reduce the amount of garbage. - Asks Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of garbage they produce . - Delivers posters to Ss , dividing them into 4 groups - Tells Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish and the team having the most good ideas is the winner ..

(124) - Gives feedback ( Use cloth bags , use tree leaves to wrap things , make garbage into fertilizer , make vegetable matter into animal food … )  Lead in to new lesson . II / Pre – reading : (15’) - Introduces the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss . 1. Pre – teach vocabulary : - representative (n) = dai dien - to protect = to keep so/ sth safe from danger . -> to protect so / sth from so / sth - natural resource (n) : coal mines , oil / gold / mineral deposits - to recycle “ to make sth already used able to be used again . - to contact = to communicate with so by telephone or letter . -> Have Ss copy . * Checking technique : Jumbled words - Stick 6 flashcards with jumbled words on the board. tconatc. psentreretivea. ceresoru. ralnatu. ropttce. cyrecel. - Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the right order . - Tells Ss the first two groups with right words will get 2 points . - Corrects and gives feedback contact – representative – resource natural – protect – recycle 2. True / false predictions - Sets the scene “ A representative from Friends of the Earth , Miss Blake , is talking to the students of Quang Trung School . Friends of the Earth shows people how to protect the environment and save natural resources “ - Puts the chart with the statements on the board . 1. Friends of the Earth is an organization to help people make friends with each other . 2. Miss Blake asks the students to remember 3 things : reduce , reuse , recycle . 3. Reduce means buying the products which are over packed . 4. We can not reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic bottles , old plastic bags . 5. Miss Blake says that we should use cloth bags and should not use plastic bags at all . 6. Recycling means not just throwing things away but trying and finding another use for them . - Asks Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false . - Calls on some Ss to read their guesses and write them on the board . II / While – reading : (15’) 1. Checking predictions - Asks Ss to open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue . - Calls on Ss to correct the false statements ..

(125) - Gives feedback 1. False -> an organization to help people 2. True 3. False -> Reduce means not buying … 4. False -> We can reuse things … 5. True 6. True 2. Comprehension questions : - Asks Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs . - Monitors and helps Ss with their work - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . - Gives feedback a. Reduce means not buying products which are over packed . b. We can reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic bottles and old plastic bags . c. Recycle means not just throwing things away . Try and find another use for them . d. We can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an organization like Friends of the Earth , going to the local library or asking your family and friends . e. We should not use plastic bags because when we throw them away , they could stay very long and could not be self- destroyed . IV / Post – reading : (9’) Discussion “How to protect our environment ?” - Asks Ss to express their opinions / ideas on this topic . - Writes their ideas on the board into a list - Gives feedback , corrects and lets them copy . V / Homework : (1’) 1. Write the questions and full answers in your exercise notebook . 2. Do the exercises ( 1,2 ) in the Workbook . Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 22 Period 62. Teaching date: January 11th, 2012. Unit 10: Recycling Parts of lesson : Speak A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + practice giving and responding to instructions . + develop ss speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : Fertilizer, Compost, compost heap, Fabric,Leather 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbook, a chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : (5’) - Ss go to the board and write the words thet they have learn last period. - Ss answer the question a,c at page 90. - T gets feedback and give marks. II / Warm up : (5’) Kim,s game.

(126) * Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers , books , cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars , plastic bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable matter , clothes , shoes , school bags … * Speak III/ Pre- speaking : (10’) - Introduces the topic of the speaking and some new words to students . 1. Pre-teach vocabulary : - Fertilizer (n) : Farmer often use this thing to make their plants or trees grow well . -> to fertilize - Compost (n) : What do you call the fertilizer made from spoiled food , leaves , vegetable mater ? -> compost heap - Fabric (n) = material - Leather (n) : What are the shoes made of ? + Have Ss copy in their notebooks .  Checking technique : Bingo 2. Dictation list : - Tells Ss they are going to listen to the words for items and put them into the right groups . - Draws the table on the words and put them in the right columns . - Models some words . - Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up - After listening , asks Ss to work in pairs and give their answers . - Reads the words again and corrects Group Paper Glass Plastic Metal Fabric Leather Vegetable matter. Items used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard boxes ( bottles , glasses , jars ) (Plastic bags , plastic bottles ) ( food cans , drinking tins ..) Clothes ( cloth bags , material ) ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags ) Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits ). IV / While – speaking : (15’) Mapped dialogue : - Puts the mapped dialogue chart on the board . - Elicits the exchanges from students - Has some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange . - After fishing the dialogue , asks a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue . a. Open pairs : - Asks some pairs to practice in front of class . b. Closed pairs : - Asks Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list - Monitors and corrects. A B Which group ( do clothes ) Put ( them ) in fabric belong to ? What can we do with We can ( recycle them and ( those clothes ) ? make them into paper or shopping bags . Is / are ( fruit vegetable matter ) ? That is right.

(127) What will we do with We make ( it into compose (it ) ? and fertilizer our field . ) V / Post speaking : ( 7’) - T asks ss to make the dialogue freely. - T- ss get feedback and corrects if necessary. VI.Consolidation: (2’) - T asks ss to retell the content of the lesson. VII / Home work : (1’) 1. Copy down the dialogue , replacing the information . 2. Do the exercises in the work book. Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Week 22 Period 63. Teaching date: January 13rd, 2012. Unit 10: Recycling Parts of lesson : Listen A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + listen for specific information about making compost . + develop ss listening skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : compost heap, shade, tissue, rat, shell, pick, shovel, moisture, condensation. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Textbook, chart, cassette, paper copies. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I / Check- up : (5’) - Ss go to the board and write the words thet they have learn last period. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II/Pre-listening: ( 12’) T sets the scene: We will know the way that they make compost by listening the passage. - T teaches some new words: +compost heap (n) (example) + shade(n) (example) + tissue(n) (example) + rat (n) (example) + shell (n) (real objects) + pick (n) (example) + shovel (n) (example) + moisture (n) (example) + condensation (n) (example) - T helps ss to pronounce words. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. - T asks ss to give their predict. III.While-listening: (15’) - T hangs on the chart. - Tells Ss they are going to listen to an expert who gives the instructions to make compost ..

(128) - Asks Ss to open their books and read the multiple choice questions - Ss listen to the tape 3 times. - Ss give the answer. - Gets Ss to give their answers and correct - T-ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. a. –A b- B c-B d-D - Lets them copy . IV.Post-listening: (10’) - T delivers some paper copies to Ss. - Ss listen to the tape again and complete the passage. * Today I’m going to explain ………….(1) a compost heap.First of all you must use only …………. (2), Which includes tea leaves, egg shells- but wash the shell first –and …………..(3) .Don’t use any meat or grain ……………(4) because this attracts rats. - ss give their predicts first. - Ss listen to the tape 3 times. - Gets Ss to give their answers and correct - T-ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. 1.how to start 2.vegetable matter 3.tissues 4.products V.Consolidation: (2’) - T asks ss to retell how to make compost. VI.Homework: (1’) - Learnt the new words by heart - Prepare the next part of lesson- Read Rút kinh nghiệm: ……………………………………………………………………………………. ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: January 30th, 2012. Week 23 Period 64. Unit 10: Recycling Parts of lesson : Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + read the text about the recycling. + know some new words. + develop ss reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : tire, pipe, deposit, to refill, to melt >< to freeze 2.Grammar: Passive voice C/ Teaching aids : Textbook, chart, word square chart, pictures. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I / Warm- up : (5’) Word square E N V E L O P E. N B E J U S R A. V C D U S T O B. I G R E E N T R. R A D Y D O E C. O R O I P T C A. N B P L A S T I. M A P A P E R B. E G U R E D U C. N E R S R E U S. T R E C Y C L E.

(129) R D. E E. C E. E E. E F. N G. C H. A G. E I. E J. K L. - Tell Ss the topic about the environment and there are 12 hidden words . - Divide the class into 4 groups . - Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece of paper and hand in when they finish - Tell Ss the group with the most right words is the winner . Answer key : environment , garbage , pure , used paper , protect . envelope , dust , green tree , can , plastic , paper bag , reduce , reuse , recycle II / Pre – reading : (14’) - Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . - Tell Ss they are going to read a page in a newspaper giving some recycling facts to protect the environment . - Ask them to look at the board and guess what they are going to read . + What do people do with used things ? + What can they make from them ? - Call on some Ss to write their guesses on the board Car ties -> ………….. Milk bottles ->…………… Glass -> ………….. Drink cans -> ………….. Household and garden waste -> ……… …. - tire (n) : using picture - pipe (n) : using drawing - deposit (n) : khoan tien gui vao mot tai khoan - to refill = to fill something empty again - to melt >< to freeze - Get Ss to copy in their notebooks . * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember III / While – reading : (15’) 1. Grid - Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it - Ask Ss to open their books and read the text . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of recycling facts mentioned in the text . - Call on some Ss to write the information in the grid on the board . Answer Key : Used things Recycling Facts Car tires are recycled to make pipes and floor recoverings Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled Glass (with milk ) is broken up , melted and made into Drink cans new glassware Household and are brought back for recycling garden waste is made into compost . 2. Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions . - Get them to compare their answers with their friends ..

(130) - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . - Give feedback a. People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles . b. The glass is broken up , melted and made into new glassware . c. The Oregon government made a new law that there must be a deposit on all drink cans . The deposit is returned when people bring the cans back for recycling . d. Compost is made from household and garden waste . e. If we have a recycling story to share , we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265 456. IV / Post – reading : (10’) - Ask Ss to look at their books and complete the sentences to make a list of recycled things . - Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud . => The sentences they have read are the passive . Passive Form in the present Simple S + am/ is / are + Past participle - It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the verb . - How to change an active sentence to a passive voice : Active S V O Passive eg : I. S + be + PII love you. by O. You are loved by me Have Ss copy  Change these sentences into the passive 1. Lan like pop music . 2. They play table tennis every day 3. We do these exercises in the notebooks . 4. He feeds 5 chickens . 5. She buy a lot of food . - Call on some Ss to read their completed sentences in front of class . - Give feedback 1. Pop music is liked by Lan . 2. Table tennis is played every day 3. These exercises are done in the notebooks by us . 4. Five chickens are fed by him 5. A lot of food is bought by her . V / Homework : (1’) 1. Copy down all the passive sentences in their note books . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………... ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... ………… Teaching date: February 1st, 2012. Week 23 Period 65. Unit 10: Recycling.

(131) Parts of lesson : Write A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + write a set of instructions , using the sequencing . + develop Ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : to soak, to mash, wire mesh, bucket, mix, mixture, firmly, mosquitoe,tray. 2.Grammar: Simple present tense. C/ Teaching aids : drawing , mime , picture . D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss go to the board to write and pronounce the words that they have learn last period. - T gets feedback and gives marks. I / Warm- up : (5’) Lucky numbers - Write 9 numbers on the board from 1 to 9 . 1. Lucky number 2. Say this sentence in he passive “ people speak English everywhere “ 3. Say this sentence in the active “ cartoons are liked by most children “ 4. Lucky number 5. Lucky number 6. Say this sentence in the passive “ We do not use things carefully . “ 7. Say this sentence in the active “ Are candies liked by the children ? “ 8. Say this sentence in the passive “ Mr Han teaches Maths . “ 9. Say this sentence in the passive “ Vegetables do not eat meat . “ - Divide the class into 2 teams . II / Pre- writing : (10’) - Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss . - Set the scene : tell Ss they are going to read a text about how to recycle used paper . 1. Pre-teach vocabulary : - to soak : put sth in liquid for a time so that it becomes completely wet . - to mash : mime - wire mesh (n) : example - bucket (n) : drawing - Mix(v) : example - Mixture (n) : example - Firmly (adv) : example - Mosquitoe (n) : example - Tray(n) :Picture -> Have Ss copy down . * Checking vocabulary : Slap the board 2. Ordering prediction : - Put the verbs on the board randomly in a flow chart - Ask Ss to work in groups to predict the order of the actions soak dry pull out mix press mash 1 2 3 4 5 6 - Call on about 2 pairs to write their answers on the board . - Explain the process of recycling , using mimes or Vietnamese and correct . - Feedback 1. soak 2. mash 3. mix.

(132) 4. pull out 5. press 6. dry III / While – writing : (15’) - Ask Ss to open their books , read the text and fill in the verbs - Monitor and correct the exercise in the text book . - Feedback 1. use 2. mix 3. place 4. press 5. wrap 6. wait 7. dry * Recall - Ask Ss to close their books - Write the sequencing on the board and have Ss to practice speaking first - Call on Ss to say the sentences from memory . - Get Ss to write the text in brief using the sequencing . - Monitor and help Ss with their work . - Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class . - Feedback First , soak old newspaper in a bucket overnight . Then , mash the paper by a wooden spoon . Next , mix the mashed paper with water . After that , use a wire mesh to pull the mixture out , put it on the cloth and press it down firmly . Finally , take the mesh out of the cloth & dry it in the sun . IV / Post – writing : ( 9’) Ordering pictures - Stick the pictures on the board randomly - Ask Ss to listen and work in groups to rearrange the pictures according to the instructions on how to prepare the tealeaves . - Read the instructions aloud . a. First take the used tealeaves from the tea pot . b. Next scatter the tealeaves on a tray . c. Then dry the leaves in the sun . d. Finally , put the dry leaves in a pot for future use . V / Homework : (1’) 1. Write the instructions on how to make a thing you have ever made using the sequencing 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 23 Period 66. Teaching date: February 2nd, 2012 Unit 10: Recycling Parts of lesson : Language focus. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + form the passive in Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives. +help ss to do some exercises. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar:. C/ Teaching aids : Cardboards , poster , handouts ….. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’).

(133) - Ss go to the board and complete the sentences. 1.People / burn / tea leaves / keep away / mosquitoes/ People burn dry tea leaves to keep mosquitoes away. 2. Car tires / make / shoes/ sandals / pipes / floorcoverings Car tires are made into shoes,sandals, pipes and floorcoverings. II / Warm up : (5’) Questions game - Call on a student to go to the board and give him or her a job name . - Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking yes-no questions - The chosen student can only answer yes or no - Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a point and take the place of the last chosen student . Example questions : - Do you get a big salary ? - Do you wear uniform ? III / Language focus Activity1. The passive forms (19’) 1.1 Passive Form in the Present Simple S + am / is / are + past participle => It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the verb . Ex 1 : Work with a partner - Ordering pictures : + Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures to put them in the correct order according to the instructions + Call on some groups to give their answers . + Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6 - Writing : + Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form + Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to the board and write their sentences + Correct and give feedback 1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple S + will / shall + be + past participle - Have Ss copy down - Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the gaps , using the Passive - Call on Ss to give their answers and correct 1. … will be shown 2. Will … be built …..? 3. … will be finished …. 4. Will … be made … ? Activity 2. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause (15’) 2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive Example : It is very difficult to speak English well Ex 3 : Complete the sentences - Ask Ss to open their books and complete the dialogues - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and correct 2.2 . S + be + adj + that / noun clause Example : We are delighted that you passed the English exam . - Get Ss to copy . Ex 4 : Complete the letter - Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words . A B Key 1. relieved (a) a. xin chuc mung 1.d 2. Congratulation b. trong cho 2.a.

(134) 3. Look forward to( c. xac nhan lai 3.b 4. confirm (v) d. nhe nhom 4. c - Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary - Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box - Get some Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct 0. are delighted 1. was happy 2. am relieved 3. is afraid 4. Are … sure … 5. am certain - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud IV / Homework : (1’) 1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents are delighted that he passed his English exam ……” 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... ………….. Unit 11: Travelling around Vietnam I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be able to + use some expressions to express their interest. + to make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions .. + know how to write a narrative , using a guided composition . + use Present and Past participles to describe things and people and the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …? “ II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassets III. Procedure : Lesson 1. Getting started Listen and read. Lesson 2. Speak. Lesson 3. Listen. Lesson 4. Read. Lesson 5. Write. Lesson 6. Language focus. Practicing the dialogue to to use some expressions to express their interest Making and responding to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions . Listening for specific information about the correct positions on the map. Reading the text to get the information from simple tourist advertisements . Writing a narrative , using a guided composition. Giving students further practice in using Present and Past participles to describe things and people and the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …? “ form the passive in Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives .. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………….

(135) ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 24 Period 67. Teaching date: February 6th, 2012. Unit 11: Travelling around Vietnam Lesson 1 : Getting started and Listen and read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + use some expressions to express their interest. + know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : Crop, water buffalo, sugar cane, a forty- minute drive, farmland, harbor, bay, gate . 2.Grammar: Express interest . Express a request: Would you mind ( if)…………? C/ Teaching aids : Cassette , 2 charts, pictures . D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure I /Check –up: (5’) - Change the sentences into passive. 1. He reads the comic. 2. She watched the T.V last night. - Ss give the answer,T gets feedback and gives marks. II. Warm up : (5’) * Getting Started : Jumbled words - Writes the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board - Asks each team to connect the words to make the right phrases for places of interest and write them on the board as fast as possible => Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple Literature , Nha rong Harbor . - Asks Ss to open their books and match the names with the pictures. - Call son some Ss to give their answers a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Na rong Harbor c. The Temple Literature d. Ha Long Bay - Calls some Ss to read the proper names aloud . III / Pre- reading : (10’) - Introduces the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . - Sets the scene and put the chart with questions on the board a. Where does Hoa meet The Jones ? b. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam? c. How do they travel to Ha Noi ? d. What do they see along the road to Ha Noi ? e. What would Tim like to do ? - Asks Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes . - Calls on some pairs to give their answers . *. Pre- teach Vocabulary : - Crop (n) : something such as grain , rice , fruit … is grown in one season . - Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar ) - Water buffalo (n) : con trau - a forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes - farmland( n) dat nong trai.

(136) Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N Ex : a three – month vacation / a thirteen – year – old – boy * Checking vocabulary : Bingo IV / While – reading : (15’) - Asks Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False - Read the sentences aloud and call on some Ss to answer , then have them correct the false sentences and get them to write in their notebooks . a. T b. T d. T e . T c. F -> … in a taxi f. F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown around Ha Noi . - Calls on some groups of five to practice the dialogue in front of class - Corrects their pronunciation . - T – Ss feedback the answer that Ss write on the board above. : a. Hoa meets The Jones at the airport b. Yes , it is . c. By taxi d. They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies , corn and sugar cane fields e. He would like to take a photo . V / Post – reading : ( 7’) Discussion - Asks Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the situations mentioned below . * to express interest : - I,d like you to meet my parents …. - It is nice to meet you …. - It is great to be in Viet Nam . - I would to sit with Tim ….. * to express a request : - Would you mind sitting in the front seat … - Would you mind if I took a photo ? VI. Consolidation: (2’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to give some examples . 2. Do the exercises in the workbooks. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 24 Period 68. Teaching date: February 8th, 2012. Unit 11: Travelling around Vietnam Lesson 2 : Speak A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions . + develop ss’ speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: make suggestions C/ Teaching aids : a mapped dialogue chart D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork..

(137) E / Procedure I / Check- up : (5’) - Ss write the words that they have learn last period and answer the questions. - T gets feedback and give marks. II / Warm up : (5’) What does it say ? - Chooses a student and ask him / her to go to the front of the class with his / her back to the board so that he / she can not see what is written on the board . - Writes the information on the board . - Asks the rest of the class try to help the student guess what is written on the board by asking questions until he / she says out right the words on the board . Example : Yes, I do . Ss ask : Do you like your teacher ? Or Every day Ss ask : How often do you have a shower ? III / Pre- speaking : ( 10’) - Introduce the topic of the speaking and some structures .- Today we learn how to make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions . 1. Pre- teach structures : - Set the scene : Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr. Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit the sentences from Ss . Model sentences : 1. A : Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi ? B : No problem . 2. A : Would you mind if I took a photo ? B : Not at all . => Used to make and respond to formal requests Form : 1. Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …? 2. Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple tense) …? Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple tense ) ..? Responses :  Agreement: No , I do not mind . / No , of course no . / Not at all . / Please do . / Please go head .  Disagreement : I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible I,d prefer you did not . / I,d rather you did not . - Gets Ss to copy and give some more examples with suggested words 2. Cardboard Drill 1. move your car ? (v ) 2. go out with me ? ( x) 3. wait for me ? (x) 4. Get / coffee ? (v) 5. Smoke ? (x) - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . IV / While – speaking : ( 15’) - Asks Ss to work in pairs + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the exchanges + Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the exchanges - Gives feedback. Mapped dialogue You. Tourist officer.

(138) Excuse me ! Yes ? I would like to visit a market. Would you mind suggesting one ? Not at all . How about goping to Thai Binh Market ? It opens from about 5 am to pm . That sounds interesting . Thank you . You are welcome . + Open pairs : Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue . + Closed pairs : have Ss open their books and use the information / 101 to practice other dialogues . Group 1 : Markets Group 2 : Museums Group3 : Restaurants Group 4 : Stamps Group 5 : Zoo and Botanical Garden V / Post – speaking : ( 7’) - Calls on some volunteers from each group to practice in front of class . - Ss rewrite the completed dialogues in their note books . VI. Consolidation: (2’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. VII / Homework : (1’) 1. Do the exercises in the workbook . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 24 Period 69. Teaching date: February 10th, 2012. Unit 11: Travelling around Vietnam Lesson 3 : Listen + Test 15’ A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + listen and match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map. + develop ss’ litening skill. + review some words and structures that they have learn by doing the test. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : Highway ,Tourist information center, starve, book seat. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Cassette , a route map … D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure I / Check- up : (15’) - T delivers the test to ss. ĐỀ A I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1. My little brother often ………..asleep if the film is not exciting. a. feels b.plays c. gets d.falls 2. I drink a lot of coffee so as to keep me …………… a. wakeful b.awake c.sleepy d. conscious.

(139) 3. Linh went to the shop in order………….some milk. a.get b.got c.getting d. to get 4. When people ……………..paper,they put it into use again. a.recycle b.play c. watch d.read 5. Do you mind ………..the door? a. close b.closing c.to close d.closes 6. The glass …………….into small pieces. a.break b.broke c.broken d. is broken 7. It’s easy to……….. the exercise,Hoa. a.angry b.rest c.understand d.wear 8. The antonym of the word “easy” is ………………. a.listen b. build c.look d.difficult 9. Would you mind if I ………………..the door? a.opening b.open c.opens d.opened 10. The adverb of the adjective “careful” is “………….” a.careless b.care c.carelessly d.carefully 11. Tires are made …………pipes and floor coverings. a.in b.into c.of d.at 12. Do you mind if I take a photo? a.No. I’m not b.No, I don’t mind c. Yes, let do it d.Yes, I like II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. People wash the vegetables carefully.(chuyển sang câu bị động) The vegetables are.......................................................................................................... 2. Mr.Jones got up early this morning so as to get to the school on time. Mr.Jones got up early this morning in order.................................................................. ĐỀ B I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1. My little brother often ………..asleep if the film is not exciting. a. falls b. gets c. plays d. feels 2. I drink a lot of coffee so as to keep me …………… a. sleepy b. awake c. wakeful d. conscious 3. Linh went to the shop in order………….some milk. a. to get b. getting c. got d. get 4. When people ……………..paper,they put it into use again. a. read b.recycle c. watch d. play 5. Do you mind ………..the door? a. closing b. to close c. closes d. close 6. The glass …………….into small pieces. a. is broken b.broken c.broke d. break 7. It’s easy to……….. the exercise,Hoa. a. understand b. wear c. angry d. rest 8. The antonym of the word “easy” is ………………. a. build b. look c.difficult d. listen 9. Would you mind if I………………..the door? a.opened b.opens c.open d.opening 10.The adverb of the adjective “careful” is “………….” a.carelessly b.carefully c.careless d.care 11. Tires are made …………pipes and floor coverings. a.into b.in c.at d.on 12. 12. Do you mind if I take a photo? a.No. I’m not b. Yes, let do it c. No, I don’t mind d.Yes, I like.

(140) II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. People wash the vegetables carefully.(chuyển sang câu bị động) The vegetables are................................................................................................................... 2. Mr.Jones got up early this morning so as to get to the school on time. Mr.Jones got up early this morning in order........................................................................... ANSWER KEYS: ĐỀ A I.Choose the best answer : (0.5m x 12) 1d 2b 3d 4a 5b 6d 7c 8d 9d 10d 11b 12b II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 2m x 2) 1. The vegetables are washed carefully (by people). 2. Mr.Jones got up early this morning in order to get to the school on time. ĐỀ B I.Choose the best answer : (0.5m x 12) 1a 2b 3a 4b 5a 6a 7a 8c 9a 10b 11a 12c II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 2m x 2) 1. The vegetables are washed carefully (by people). 2. Mr.Jones got up early this morning in order to get to the school on time. II / Warm up : ( 5’)Quiz what is this place ? - Asks questions and call the student who puts his / her hand up first to answer - Tells Ss each place consists of 3 questions ; 3 points for the first question , 2 points for the second question , 1 point for the third question . a. What is this place ? 1. it is called the city of Eternal Spring . 2. It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes . 3. You can find the most kinds of flowers here . b. What is this place ? 1. It is a seaside resort . 2. It has a very big monument of Buddha . 3. It has an Oceanic Institute c. What is this place ? 1. It is a mountainous resort . 2. It has tribal villages . 3. Sometimes it has snow . d. What is this place ? 1. It is recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESSCO . 2. It has a lot of caves . 3. It contains of a lot of islands . Key : a. Da Lat b. Nha Trang c. Sa Pa d. Ha Long Bay => Lead in the new lesson . III / Pre- listening : (7’) Introduces the topic of the listening and some new words 1. Set the scene “ The Jones family are going around Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in the maps . Listen to them and match the places to the correct positions on the maps “ - Lets Ss guess their correct positions on the map - Calls on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board. 2. Pre – teach vocabulary : - Highway ( n) - Tourist information center (n) - starve(v).

(141) -book(v)seat: - T helps ss to pronounce words.(chorusly / individually) IV / While – listening : (10’) - Asks Ss to list the places on the maps . - Plays the tape 2 or 3 times - Asks Ss to compare their answers with their friends . - Calls on some Ss to read their answers and give the correct answers Answer key : a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station d) pagoda e) temple - Plays the tape once more to check the answers ( pause at some important paragraph ) V / Post – listening : (7’) - Lets Ss retell the main content of the conversation. VI / Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart new words . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: February 13rd, 2012. Week 25 Period 70. Unit 11: Travelling around Vietnam Lesson 4 : Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + get the information from simple tourist advertisements . + develop ss’ reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary :accommodation, giant, slope, jungle, limestone, florist, to import >< to export 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Cassette , Pictures of cities , 2 posters , gap fill chart … D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure I / Check- up : (5’) Change the sentences into the passive form. 1.Lan cleans the house everyday. The house is cleaned by Lan everyday. 2.I bought a doll yesterday. A doll was bought yesterday. - Ss write the answer on board. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (5’) Word square Tourist sites A D D Y R E S O R T D C A T G B E A C H K N L R Y S A P A E B U A I M K S A P C A H T B V B I P J I C A V E S L D K I T.

(142) H L N L A K E C T A M O U N T A I N R D A N H A T R A N G E A G G E F G X C U L - Asks Ss to find 13 hidden words and write them on a piece of paper . Answer Key : resort , beach , Sa Pa , caves , lakes mountains , Nha Trang Bach Ma , Ha Long , Da lat , Tribe Seaside , The citadel III / Pre- reading : (10’) - Introduces the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . “we are going to get the information from simple tourist advertisements ,then we will know more about the tourist sites in Vietnam”. - T teaches some new words. - accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay in - giant (adj ) = huge / very big - slope (n) - jungle (n) = a very thick forest - limestone (n) = da voi - florist (n) : a person who sells flowers - to import >< to export * Checking vocabulary : What and where IV / While – reading : (15’) 1. Grid : - Asks Ss to read the advertisements about the resorts and check (v) the topics mentioned in the grid - Gets Ss to work in pairs to compare their answer - Calls on some Ss to give their answers Answer Key : Nha Trang : Flights to Ha Noi , railway , hotels , local transport , tourist attractions . Da Lat : Hotels , local transport , waterfalls , tourist attractions Sa Pa : Hotels , local transport , mountain slopes tourist attractions , villages . Ha Long Bay : World Heritage , tourist attractions , sand beaches , railways , hotels , caves , locals transport . - Have Ss copy down 2. Matching : - puts the poster on the board and asks Ss to match the words or phrases in Column A to column B A B 1. Nha Trang a. tribal villages , mountain climbing 2. Da lat b. The place where President Ho Chi 3. Sa Pa Minh left Viet Nam in 1911. 4. Ha long Bay c. Swimming and sunbathing . 5. Nha Rong d. Oceanic Institute Harbor e. Flower gardens . - Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to connect the words Answer Key : 1. d 2.e 3.a 4.c 5.b 3. Grid - Gets Ss to open their books , read the text on page 105 and check (v) the boxes ..

(143) - Monitors and corrects . V / Post – reading : (7’) Role play - Tells Ss to ask and answer questions using the information in the text . + Write the model on the board . A : Where should ( Andrew ) go ? B : He should go to ( Sa Pa ) . A : Why ? B : Because ( he studies tribes and he likes mountain – climbing ) - Asks Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking . - Monitors and corrects - Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class . VI.Consolidation: (2’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. VII / Homework : (1’) 1. Redo the exercises and copy in their notebooks . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: February 15th, 2012. Week 25 Period 71. Unit 11: Travelling around Vietnam Lesson 5 : Write A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + know how to write a narrative , using a guided composition . + develop ss’ writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : canoe, to paddle, to hire, to overturn, to rescue . 2.Grammar: the simlpe past tense. C/ Teaching aids : charts. E / Procedure I / Check- up : (5’) - Ss go to the board to write and pronounce the words that they have learn last period. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II/ Warm up : (7’) Which word ? ( Get Ss to study the definition of a narrative by a gap fill ) - Puts the missing words on the board and have Ss study first : written – climax – attention – brief – events - Show the chart and ask Ss to ill in the gaps with the words in the box . A narrative is a sequence of …(1)… These events are usually …(2)… in chronological order and often lead to a …(3) … The first sentence of a narrative should get the reader,s …(4)… and the ending should be …(5)… - Asks Ss of each group to go to the board and write the words as fast as possible . - Explains the definition in Vietnamese Answer key : 1. events 2. written 3. climax 4. attention 5. brief III / Pre- writing : ( 7’)Introduces the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss ..

(144) 1. Pre – teach Vocabulary - canoe (n) : using picture - to paddle (mime ) -> paddle (n) - to hire : thue muon - to overturn : lat up / lat do - to rescue = to save somebody ,s life from danger + Get Ss to copy down . * Checking vocabulary : Slap the board 2. Ordering statements : Setting the scene “ Last week , while on vacation in Da lat , The Jones family had quite an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong Lake . What did they do and what happened to them ? “ - Asks Ss to read the first part of the story / 105 and rearrange the sentences / 106 to complete the story . - Calls on some pairs to give their answers and correct . - Gets some Ss to read the story aloud for the class and correct pronunciation errors . - Gives feedback : c -> a -> g ->d -> f -> b -> e IV / While – writing : (15’) 1. Explanation : - lets Ss look at the pictures / 106 – 107 and guess the meaning of the new words . - Explains the meanings of these words + to stumble : truot chan + to go off : vang ra + to realize : nhan ra - Gets Ss to copy 2. Ordering pictures : - Asks Ss to look at the pictures again and rearrange the events in the correct chronological order to make it a story . - Calls on some Ss to give their answers and correct . - Gives feedback : d -> b -> e -> h -> a -> f -> c -> g 3. Write – it – up : - Asks Ss to use the pictures already rearranged and the given words to write the story about Uyen . - Monitors and helps Ss with words or structures while they are writing . * Notice : The past simple tense is often used in a narrative . - Asks them to exchange their writings to correct for each other . - Calls on some Ss to read their story aloud for he class - Give feedback : Uyen had a day to remember last week . she had a math exam on Friday but she got up late . She realized her alarm clock did not go off . As he was leaving home , it started to rain heavily . Uyen tried to run as fast as she could . Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell onto the road . Her school bag went into a pool of water and everything got wet . Strangely , the rain stopped as she got to her classroom . Luckily , Uyen had enough time to finish her exam . V / Post – writing : (9’) - Calls on some Ss to demonstrate the completed story in front of class . - Copy the story in their notebooks . VI.Consolidation: (1’) - T asks ss to retell how to write a narrative. VII / Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart all new words and copy in their notebooks . 2. Work in groups of 4 writing a story to tell the class in the next lesson . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………….

(145) Teaching date: February 17th, 2012. Week 25 Period 72. Unit 11: Travelling around Vietnam Lesson 6 : Language focus A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + use Present and Past participles to describe things and people + make the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …? “ B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : chart, pictures. E / Procedure I / Check- up : (3’) - Complete the sentences. 1.She /finish / work/ then / go / movie theater / last night. She finished her work then she went to the movie theater last night. 2.Nhan / walk / across/ grass / park / at the present. Nhan is walking across the grass in the park at the present. II / Warm up (3’) Memory game - Asks Ss to look at the pictures / 109 carefully for 20 seconds and close their books . - Tells them the team having the most right words is the winner . - Let Ss open their books again , go through the words and correct . Answer Key : box , lamp truck , flowers , elephant , bear , rabbit III / Language focus 1. Activity 1 : (12’) * Pre-teach : - Asks Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard . What are they doing ? “ - Asks questions and call on Ss to answer then correct . T : What is Mr Quang doing ? Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs . T : What is Miss Lien doing ? Ss : She is carrying a bag . T : ( Nam ) Ss : ( standing next to Miss Lien / talking to Miss Lien ) T : ( Ba ) Ss : ( sitting under the tree / reading a book ) T : ( Lan ) Ss : ( standing by the table ) T : ( Nga and Hoa ) Ss : ( playing chess )  Model sentences : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang ( present participle phrase ) Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with active meaning - Let Ss copy.

(146) * Practice : - Asks Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is , using the information above Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang - Corrects and feedbacks 2. Activity 2 : ( 12’) * Pre –teach : Matching. - Asks Ss to look at the words in the box and the picture / 109 to do the matching A B Key 1. box a. wrap in 1. f 2. truck b. dress in 2. c 3. lamp c. recycled from 3. e 4. doll d. keep in 4. b 5. flowers e. made in 5. a 6. toys f. paint 6. d - Asks Ss to look at the picture / 109 again and answer the questions : - Where is the old lamp made in ? - What color is the box painted ? - What is truck recycled from ? - What color is the doll dressed in ? - What are the flowers wrapped in ? - Where are the toys kept ? - Calls on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions => Asks “ How much is the old lamp made in China ? Model Sentences : The old lamp made in China is five dollars . ( past participle phrase ) Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle Irregular verb Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with passive meaning . - Let Ss copy * Practice : - Asks Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions and answer 1. T : How much is the box painted green ? St: The box painted green is one dollar - Asks Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the questions ( Using the information in the matching ) - Calls on some pairs to demonstrate for the class . 3. Activity 3 : ( 7’) 3.1 Presentation : - Asks Ss to repeat the models sentences : Would you mind if + Verb ( in Past simple tense …) ? Do you mind if + Verb ( in present simple tense …) ? Do you mind / would you mind + verb – ing …? + Agreement : No , I do not mind . / No , of course not . / Not at all . / Please do . / Please go ahead . - Disagreement : I,d prefer you did not . / I,d rather you did not . => Meaning : Xin ban cam phien … - Get Ss to copy . 3.2 Practice : Cardboard Drill - Prepare 4 cardboards with cues including checks (v) and crosses (x).

(147) a. move / car (v) c. get / coffee (x) b. put out / cigarette (v) d. wait / moment (x) Model : T : Would you mind moving your car ? Ss - Calls on 2 or 3 Ss to repeat it and correct . + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the class . + Closed pairs : Get the whole class to practice - Go on until the last cue 4. Activity 4 : ( 13’) 4.1 Gap fill - Puts the gap – fill chart on the board .. :. No. ,. of. course. not. .. - Asks Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the gaps . turned off – explain – telling – ask 1. Would you mind …… me something about it ? 2. Do you mind if I …… you a question ? 3. Would you please …. this new word to me ? 4. Would you mind if I ….. the television ? Answer Key : 1.telling 2.ask 3.explain 4. turned off 4.2 Ordering pictures - Asks Ss to write the numbers and look at the pictures , listen to the situations and order the pictures ( 1-> 6) 1. turn on the stereo 2. watch TV while eating 3. sit down 4. postpone the meeting 5. turn on the air – conditioner 6. smoke - Asks Ss to give their answers 1.d 2.f 3.a 4.c 5.e 6.b - Gets Ss to work in pairs , playing the roles to demonstrate the exchanges based on the models below the pictures . Listens and corrects their mistakes . V / Homework : ( 1’) 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 26 Period 73. Teaching date: February 20th, 2012. Consolidation A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the knowledge they have learnt in Unit 9, 10, 11 and know how to supplement what they are short of . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : - T help ss to retell the usage of In order to/ so as to , Make request with “mind” and The passive voice. I . Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence using so as to /in order to towhere necessary 1. I keep my hens in a field surrounded by wire netting. I want to protect them against the foxes..

(148) 2. I am learning skiing at an indoor school. I want to be able to ski when I get to Switzerland. 3. The workmen left red lights near the hole. Thay wanted to warn motorists. 4. He invented a wife and six children. By this trick he hoped to avoid paying income tax. 5. He didn't tell her he was going up in the spacecraft. He didn't want to alarm her. Keys: 1. I keep my hens in a field surrounded by wire netting in order to protect them against the foxes. 2. I am learning skiing at an indoor school so as to be able to ski when I get to Switzerland. 3. The workmen left red lights near the hole in order to warn motorists. 4. He invented a wife and six children in order to avoid paying income tax. 5. He didn't tell her he was going up in the spacecraft to alarm her. II. Change the sentences into passive voice. 1. They break the glass into small pieces. -->The glass is broken into small pieces 2. Wash the glass with a detergent liquid -->The glass is washed with a detergent liquid 3. People speak English over the world --> English is spoken over the world 4 Ms.Linh teaches us how to speak English properly --> We are teached how to speak English properly by Ms.Linh 5. Somebody cleans the room everyday -->The room is cleaned everyday 6. The milkman brings bottles of milk to houses -->Bottles of milk are brought to house by the milkman 7. They don't use this house very often. --> This house isn't used very often. III. Rewrite the sentences: 1.Could you open the window, please? -->Would you mind opening the window? 2. May I turn on TV? --> Do you mind turning on the TV? 3. Do you mind playing the guitar? --> Do you mind If I played the guitar? 4. Would you mind smoking in the room? -->Would you mind if people smoked in the room? - SS do to the board and do the exercises. - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if necessary. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 26 Period 74. Teaching date: February 22nd, 2012. THE ENGLISH TEST I. Aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to check up their old knowledge, the supplying what they have mistaken, help students use the structures and vocabulary to speak, listen, read, write correctly. Skills: listening, reading, speaking, writing. II. Language Contents: 1. Vocabulary: from unit 9 to unit 11..

(149) 2. Grammar: from unit 9 to unit 11. III. Teaching Aids: copied test paper, stereo. V. Time: 45’ VI. Procedures: *The content of the test: ĐỀ A I.Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the other word .(1m) 1. a. south b. bought c. found d. about 2. a. they b. think c. this d. there 3. a. minimize b. discount c. victim d. sting 4. a. compost b. limestone c. deposit d. buffalo II.Lexico: Grammar and vocabulary (3ms) 5. A: “Have a cake”? – B: “Thanks, but I have………..eaten one.” a. yet b. already c. never d. recently 6. Lien is a …………She has a flower shop in Ha Noi. a. florist b. player c. flower d. athletic 7. I’m glad …………..your mother is feeling better. Please give my love to her. a. if b. that c. whether d. while 8. Garbage can be used to make……………. a. fertile b. fertilize c. fertilizer d. fertilization 9. My computer hasn’t ………..since last week. a. worked b. work c. working d. works 10. The boy …………a book is Nam. a. read b. to read c. reading d. reads. 11. I don’t know how ………….the game. a. playing b. play c. played d. to play 12. Would you mind if I open the door? A B C D 13. The toy car ……………in China is 5 dollars. a. to make b. makes c. made d. making 14. I will pick you ………….at 7 o’clock. a. on b. at c. up d. of 15. The grapes are often made………..wine. a. into b. up c. at d. on 16……….can I get for you? a.Will b. What c. Can d. Would III.Read A.Choose the best answer to complete the passage: (1m) Nha Trang is a (1) ……………..city of South Central Vietnam. Nha Trang beach is one of the most beautiful beaches (2)……… the world.The beach (3)…………..7km long and suitable for bathing along its length. In the evening,visitors are completely bewitched( thu hút)by ( 4)………......... magnificence of nature. 1. a.easy b.beautiful c.difficult d.tribal 2. a.in b.at c.of d. after 3. a.is b.plays c.likes d.gets 4. a.θ b.an c.a d.the B.Answer the question: ( 1m) 4. Is Nha Trang in the North Central Vietnam ? …………………………………………………………………………………………………….…….. 5.How long is the beach?.

(150) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….….. IV.Write A. Sentences transformation: (2ms) 1. Lan plays soccer everyday.( .(Đổi sang câu bị động) Soccer.…………………………………………………………………………………………….….. 2. May I turn on the T.V? Do you mind………………………………………………………………………………………....? 3. My brother studies hard this year in order to pass the entrance exam to the university. My brother studies hard this year so as……………………………………………………………….. 4. The man is watching T.V.He is Mr.Minh.(Nối 2 câu lại thành một câu, dùng hiện tại phân từ) The man……………………………………………..………………………………………………… B. Complete the sentences from the given words: (1m) 5. We / go / Japan / last year. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6. Would / mind/ if / sit / down ? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Listen : (1m) A girl was riding a bike when she had (1)…………….She fell off her bike and hit her(2) …………… on the road. Her head was badly bleeding. Howerver, she was still(3).……………It was an emergency so people called (4) .………….in order take her to the hospital. 1. a. a show b. a meeting c. an accident d. a telephone 2. a. arm b. leg c. head d. nose 3. a. blue b. happy c. tired d. conscious 4. a. a doctor b. a nurse c. a car d. an ambulance ĐỀ B I.Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the other word .(1m) 1. a. bought b. south c. found d. about 2. a. think b. this c. there d.. they 3. a. minimize b. sting c. discount d. victim 4. a. compost b. buffalo c. limestone d. deposit II.Lexico: Grammar and vocabulary (3ms) 5. A: Have a cake? – B: Thanks, but I have………..eaten one. a. already b. never c. yet d. recently 6. Lien is a …………She has a flower shop in Ha Noi. a. flower b. player c. florist d. athletic 7. I’m glad …………..your mother is feeling better. Please give her my love. a. that b. if c. while d. whether 8. Garbage can be used to make……………. a. fertilize b. fertile c. fertilization d. fertilizer 9. My computer hasn’t ………..since last week. a. work b. working c. works d. worked 10.The boy …………a book is Nam. a. read b. reading c. to read d. reads 11. I don’t know how ………….the game. a. to play b. playing c. played d. play 12. Would you mind if I open the door? A B C D 13. The toy car ……………in China is 5 dollars. a. to make b. makes c. making d. made 14. I will pick you ………….at 7 o’clock..

(151) a.on b. up c. at d. of 15. The grapes are often made …………..wine. a. in b. into c. at d. on 16……….can I get for you? a.Would b.Will c.What d.Can III.Read A. Choose the best answer to complete the passage: (1m) Nha Trang is a (1) ……………..city of South Central Vietnam. Nha Trang beach is one of the most beautiful beaches (2)……… the world. The beach (3)…………..7km long and suitable for bathing along its length. In the evening, visitors are completely bewitched( thu hút)by ( 4)………......... magnificence of nature. 1. a. easy b. tribal c. difficult d. beautiful 2. a. after b. of c. at d. in 3. a. likes b. plays c. is d. gets 4. a. θ b. an c. the d. a B. Answer the question: ( 2ms) 4. Is Nha Trang in the North Central Vietnam ? …………………………………………………………………………………………………….…….. 5. How long is the beach? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….….. IV.Write A. Sentences transformation: (1m) 1. Lan plays soccer everyday.( .(Đổi sang câu bị động) Soccer.…………………………………………………………………………………………….….. 2. May I turn on the T.V? Do you mind………………………………………………………………………………………....? 3. My brother studies hard this year in order to pass the entrance exam to the university. My brother studies hard this year so as……………………………………………………………….. 4. The man is watching T.V. He is Mr.Minh.(Nối 2 câu lại thành một câu, dùng hiện tại phân từ) The man……………………………………………..………………………………………………… B. Complete the sentences from the given words: (1m) 5. We / go / Japan / last year. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6. Would / mind/ if / sit / down ? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Listen : (1m) A girl was riding a bike when she had (1)……………. She fell off her bike and hit her(2) …………… on the road. Her head was badly bleeding. Howerver, she was still(3).……………It was an emergency so people called (4) .………….in order take her to the hospital. 1. a. an accident b. a telephone c. a show d. a meeting 2. a. head b. legs c. arms d. nose 3. a. tired b. conscious c. blue d. happy 4. a. a car b. an ambulance c. a doctor d . a nurse. MA TRẬN Nhận biết TN TL. Chủ đề I.Phonetics + Vowel sound. 4. Vân dụng TN TL. Tổng 4. 1 12. II.Lexico and grammar. Thông hiểu TN TL. 1 12 3.

(152) + Language functions + prepositions of time + question words + _ed and _ing participles + perfect tense + request with “mind” III. Reading + A text about Nha trang city. 3. 4. 2 1. 3. 2. IV. Writing + passive form + _ed and _ing participles + in order/so as to + V bare + Request with “mind” + Simple past V. Listening +Unit 9 : A first- aid course Tổng. 6. 6. 6 2. 4. 2 4. 1 20. 1. 6. 6. 5. 22. 3. 2. 10. ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề KI ỂM TRA 1 TI ẾT LỚP 8(L ẦN I–HKII)(2011-2012) ĐỀA I / II (0,25m X 16= 4ms) Q 1 2 3 4 A b b c c. 5 b. 6 a. 7 b. 8 c. 9 a. 10 c. 11 d. 12 c. 13 c. 14 c. III.Read A. Choose the best answer to complete the passage (0,25m X 4 =1m) 1b 2a B. Answer the question ( 0,5m X 2 =1m) 1.No, it isn’t. 2.The beach is 7km long / It’s 7km. IV. A.Sentences transformation: (0,5m X 4 = 2ms) 1. Soccer is played by Lan everyday. 2. Do you mind turning on the T.V? / Do you mind if I turn on the T.V? 3. My brother studies hard this year so as to pass the entrance exam to the university. 4. The man watching T.V is Mr.Minh B.Complete the sentences from the given words: (0,5m X 2 =1m) 5.We went to Japan last year. 6. Would you mind if I sat down ? V.Listen : (0,25 x 4 = 1m) 1c 2c 3d 4d. 15 a 3a. 16 b 4d. ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề KI ỂM TRA 1 TI ẾT LỚP 8(L ẦN I–HKII)(2011-2012) ĐỀB I / II (0,25m X 16= 4ms) Q 1 2 3 4 A a a d d. 5 a. 6 c. 7 a. 8 d. 9 d. 10 b. 11 a. 12 c. 13 d. 14 b. 15 b. 16 c.

(153) III.Read A. Choose the best answer to complete the passage (0,25m X 4 =1m)1d B. Answer the question ( 0,5m X 2 =1m) 1. No, it isn’t. 2. The beach is 7km long / It’s 7km. IV. A.Sentences transformation: (0,5m X 4 = 2ms) 1. Soccer is played by Lan everyday. 2. Do you mind turning on the T.V? / Do you mind if I turn on the T.V? 3. My brother studies hard this year so as to pass the entrance exam to the university. 4. The man watching T.V is Mr.Minh B.Complete the sentences from the given words: (0,5m X 2 =1m) 5.We went to Japan last year. 6. Would you mind if I sat down ? V.Listen : (0,25 x 4 = 1m) 1a 2a 3b 4b. 2d. 3c. 4a. ***********************************************************************************. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be able to + make plans. + make, accept and decline invitation.. + ask and answer about the weather. . + write a postcard. II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassets III. Procedure : Lesson 1. Getting started Listen and read. Ss will be able to aware of how to make accept and decline invitations .. Lesson 2. Speak. Reading to make plans. Lesson 3. Listen +SBKT. Lesson 4. Read. Listening for specific information about the weather.+ return the test Reading the text to get the information from Quyen’s tourist .. Lesson 5. Write. Lesson 6. Language focus. Week 26 Period 75. Writing a postcard. Giving students further practice in using Past progressive, Past progressive with When and While, progressive tenses with always. Teaching date: February 24th, 2012. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 1 : Getting started and Listen and read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to aware of how to make accept and decline invitations . B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : to include, to come over, to pick so, abroad, to be / go / travel / live abroad 2.Grammar:.

(154) C/ Teaching aids : Pictures , cassette , chart ( true / false ) D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check up (5’) - Ss go to the board and complete the sentence. 1.Do/ mind / turn on/ stereo?- Do you mind turning on the stereo? 2.Would / mind / if/ sit? – Would you mind if I sat down? - get feedback and gives marks. II / Warm up : (5’) 1. Guessing game ( Getting started ) - Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to guess what country it is . - Feedback : a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan 2. Chatting : T :Where do you want to visit among these countries? Ss: …………………….. T : Why ? Ss : …………………… III / Pre- reading : (10’) - Introduce the topic of the passage:Mrs.Quyen is going to the USA for a vacation.She is ringing her friend, Mrs. Smith, to tell her about the tour. - present some new words. 1. Pre – teach Vocabulary : - to include : bao gom , gom co - to come over : to come to Someone,s house to visit for a short time - to pick so up : to come and get so in your car to drive him / her to a place - abroad (adv ) = in a foreign country -> to be / go / travel / live abroad * Checking Vocabulary : Rub out and remember 2 . True / False Prediction - Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the statements a. Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in San Francisco . b. Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her husband to stay with her while they are in town . c. Mrs Quyen does not accept Mrs smith ,s invitation because she wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend of hers . d. Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for 3 days . e. Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs Smith,s place for dinner one night . f. Mr Thanh ; Mrs Quyen,s husband , goes abroad for a business meeting . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false . - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . IV / While – reading : (15’) 1. Checking predictions : - Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue . - Call on some Ss to correct the false statements . 1. False -> Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from Ha Noi 2. True 3. False -> … because her accommodation is included in her tickets price . 4. True 5. False -> Only Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs Smith ,s . 6. True 2. Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen ,s schedule.

(155) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs to complete the grid with the information taken from the dialogue . - Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the information in the grid on the board . Date Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thu 28 Schedule coming to Going out Having Leaving San dinner San Francisco with the Francisco Smiths - Have Ss copy 3. Comprehension Questions - Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the questions . - Let Ss compare their answers with their partner. - Call on some Ss to answer - Give feedback and correct Answer key : a) No , they won,t . Because they are coming on a tour , and their accommodation is included in the ticket price , so they will stay at the hotel . b) No , he won,t . Because he will have a business meeting in the evening that day . c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel . - Get Ss to copy . V / Post – reading : (7’)  Grammar Awareness - Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the statements indicating the following situations 1. Making an invitation 2. Accepting an invitation 3. Declining an invitation 4. Making a complaint - Call on Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy . 1. Would you like to come and stay with us … ? .. you must come over for dinner one night . 2. Yes , we ,d love to but we will only be in town for three nights . 3. That is very kind of you but we are coming on a tour .. 4. Oh . dear . He is always working VI.Consolidation: (2’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. VII / Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart new words and structures to give some more examples . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook 3. Prepare the next lesson . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 27 Period 76. Teaching date: February 27th, 2012 Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 2 : Speak. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - aware of how to make accept and decline invitations ..

(156) - develove ss speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : itinerary, brochure, flight information, art gallery, gym. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check up (5’) - Ss writes the words.( to include, to come over, to pick so, abroad, to be / go / travel / live abroad ) - T gets feedback and gives marks. II.Pre-speaking : (10’) - T lets Ss do jumbled words.  Jumbled words: - Ewn Oryk = New York - Awstignonh = Washington - Sol Nagegel = Los Angeles - Oachcig = Chicago - T instructs Ss to read the flight information. T gives some new words  New words 1. itinerary (n) 2. brochure (n) 3. flight information(n) 4. art gallery(n) 5. gym (n)  What and where - Ss practice pronunciation and guess the meaning of the words then do what and where. III.Speaking: (18’) - Ss work in pairs to fill in the table with the correct information about the flight. - Ss work in pairs to make a short conversation, using the flight information.  Complete your itinerary. Use the brochures and flight information. A. Where shall we stay? B: The Revere Hotel is expensive but it has a gym. A: What time should we leave Los Angeles? B: There’s a daily flight at 10 am. Would that be OK? _________________________________________ Depart Los Angeles: Flight 835 at 10 Arrive Boston: at 4 Accommodation: Atlantic hotel Sightseeing: Art Galleries Depart Boston: Flight 710 at 10 on Thursday 22. - T asks ss to practice reading the dialogue. - T gets feedback.  Mapped dialogue(chart) “These people are making a plan for their trip from Los Angeles to Boston. Let’s do it with them!”.

(157) Where should we stay?. The Revere Hotel is expensive but it has a gym. Where should we visit? I think we should visit Havard Medical school, the Museum and Arts Gallery. What time should we leave Los Angeles? There’s a daily flight at 10 a.m, would that be OK ?. - T asks ss to make similar dialogue in pairs. - Ss presents their roles. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. III.Post- speaking: (10’) - T asks Ss to make a plan for their coming summer holiday by filling information in their itinerary. - Then T calls some pairs to demonstrate their plans for the class. - T corrects their mistakes.  Make the conversation freely. EX: Depart (Hue): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrive (HCM City) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accommodation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sightseeing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depart (HCM City) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV.Consolidation: (1’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. V.Homework : (1’) - Learn the vocabulary and grammar. - Practice reading the dialogue. - Write your itinerary into notebooks. - Prepare “Listen” Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 27 Period 77. Teaching date: February 29th, 2012 Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 3 : Listen + correcting for the test. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able - listen to the weather report then fill in the table. - develove ss listening skill. - review some grammar points and words by returning to the test. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : humid, snowy, windy, cloudy, dry . 2.Grammar:.

(158) C/ Teaching aids : chart, cassette. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check up (5’) - T shows Ss the chart and elicits the exchange. - Ss work in pairs to practice making the dialogue. T asks some pairs present their work. Then T remarks and marks. + What time ...... leave Los Angeles? - The Revere Hotel (is expensive but it has a gym.) + Where ...... stay? - I think(we should visit) Harvard Medical School. + Which place ...... visit?- (There’s) a daily flight at 10 am.(Would that be) OK? II. Pre-listening (9’) - Ss look at some pictures and say the names of these places. Then ss answer some questions - Then T explains the requirements of listening: You listen to the tape twice then fill in the blanks in the table with the information you hear. The words in the box may help you.  Question: How is the weather in these cities?. - T gives new words by explanation. - Ss copy down the words, practice reading and guess the meaning.  New words: 1. Snowy (adj): 2. Cloudy (adj): 3. Humid (adj): 4. Windy (adj): 5. Minus (adj): 6. Dry(adj): \  What and where  Guessing City. Weather. 1.Sydney 2.Tokyo 3.London 4.Bangkok 5.New York 6.Paris. Dry. Windy. Temperature Low High 26 15. Cold Warm 15 10. - T gets feedback from the students. - Ss guess to complete the table before listening to the tape III. while-listening (10’) - T plays the tape more than once. - Ss listen and check their guessing..

(159) - Some Ss present their work on the board. - T lets ss listen again to check and finally T gives the answer. City. Weather. 1.Sydney 2.Tokyo 3.London 4.Bangkok 5.New York 6.Paris. Dry Dry Humid Warm Windy Cool. Windy Windy Cold Dry Cloudy Dry. Temperature Low High 20 26 15 22 -3 7 24 32 8 15 10 16. IV. post-listening (5’) - T has Ss ask and answer the questions about the weather and temperature using the information in the table. - Ss do as T asks in pairs. Then some pairs present their work. - T remarks and marks.  Make the dialogue:  Suggestion: A:What’s the weather like in Sydney? B: It will be dry and windy A: How about the temperature? B: The low will be twenty and the high 26 degree -------------- Talk about flight information. -Weather reports - Be going to+ bare infinitive V.CONSOLIDATION: (1’) - SS retell the content of the lesson. VI. Return to the forty- five test: (15’) - Ss deliver the test to ss. - T gets out some mistakes that ss got in the test. + request with “mind” + pasive voice + language funtions - T retells some structures using in the test. - T asks ss to do the exercise . * Make sentences from the given words. 1. table/ clean/ Hoa. - The table was cleaned by Hoa. 2. horse/ ride / Minh - The horse was riden by Minh. 3. Would /you/ mind / drink/ wine? - Would you mind drinking wine? 4. Would / you / mind /cook/ dinner? - Would you mind If I cooked the dinner? V. HOMEWORK (1’) - Learn by heart new words. - Prepare:Unit 12 – Read /P. 116 Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………….

(160) Teaching date: March 3rd, 2012. Week 27 Period 78. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 5: Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be to - Know some famous place in USA. - practice comprehensive skill to get main information. - know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : volcano, lava, wharf, wine-growing area, carve 2.Grammar: past simple, passive voice (review) C/ Teaching aids : chart, pictures.. D/ Teachnique: eliciting,pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss make the dialogue talking about the weather. - T gets feedback and marks. II. Pre-reading (12’) - T sets the scene: + Which interesting places have you visited? - T gives pictures and asks Ss to talk about Mrs. Quyen’s vacation to USA. - Ss guess the places which Mrs Quyen visited.  Pre-questions: 1. What places of interest did Mrs Quyen visit in her tour? 2. What did she do and see?. Empire State Building. Waikiki Beach. San Francisco Bay Mount Rushmore - From ss answer ,T leads into new lesson and presents some new words” Today we will find some famous place that Mrs. Quyen visited in the USA.”.

(161)  New words 1. volcano (n): 2. lava (n): 3. wharf (n): 4. wine-growing area: 5. carve  be carved into: - Ss take note, guess the meamings and practice reading the words aloud individually and chorus. Then T lets them do slap the board to check the words.  Slap the board - Ss read the text and answer the questions and complete the table on page 117 groups. - Each group presents their work on a poster. - T corrects and marks. III. While-reading (20’) - T instructs Ss how to do the exercise. - Ss read the questions a – e to get main information. 1. Complete the table: (with key) Place Hawaii New York Chicago Mount Rushmore San Francisco. What she did and saw Went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano Went shopping, bought lots of souvenirs Saw Lake Michigan Saw the heads of 4 American presidents Visited Fisherman's Wharf, the Napa Valley wine - growing area and the Alcatraz prison. - Ss answer the questions in pairs. - T gives the feedback 2. Answer the questions: a. She went there by plane. b. She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz. c. It is a mount where the heads of four America presidents are carved into the rock; (and it can be seen from more than 100 kilometers away.) d. It is also called “ The Windy City”. She went shopping. IV. Post-reading (6’) -T gives the exercise on the extra-board. - T guides her Ss to do home work. Marks  Choose the best answer 1. How did you get to Hawaii? We ______ a plane. A. made B. took C. did D. fly 2. The heads of four American ____ are carved into Rushmore. A. presidents B. chairmen C. head leaders D. people 3. Mount Rushmore ____ from more than 100 kms away. A. can be seen B. could be seen C. can be looked D. could be looked 4. Chicago is often ______“ The windy city” A. called B. said C. spoken D. talked - Ss work in pairs to do. Some pairs present their work. - T gets feedbacks. - T asks ss to tell some famous places in Viat Nam(group work).

(162) - Ss answer. - T gets feedbacks. Ex: + The temple of Literature. + Ha Long Bay + etc,.... V.Consolidation: (1’) - Ss retell the conttent of the lesson. VI. Homework (1’) - Do the exercises again. - Do: 5/P.73(WB) - Prepare: Unit 12 – Write/P. upload.123doc.net Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 28 Period 79. Teaching date: March 5th, 2012. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson 6 : Write A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be to - Help students practice writing a postcard. - develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids :chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - SS write the new words.( volcano, lava, wharf, wine-growing area, carve ) - Ss name some famous places in the USA. - T gets feedback and marks. II. Pre-writing(13’) - T sets the scene:  Questions: Marks 1. How did Mrs. Quyen go to Kilauea Volcano? 2. Where in San Francisco did Mrs. Quyen see the famous prison? 3. What is special about Mount Rushmore?  Chatting: - Have you gone on a vacation? - Do you usually write a postcard to their friends when you go on a vacation? - Ss answer. - T explains the requirements of the exercise. - T helps ss to understand the introduction. Ex 1: Complete the postcard Mrs. Quyen sent from the USA.( chart).

(163) - Ss complete the postcard Mrs.Quyen sent from the USA. - Some ss read the postcard in front of the class. - T gives the key.  Key: Dear Sally, We are having a wonderful time in the USA. The people are friendly and the weather has been warm and sunny. In San Francisco, I visited my friend, Sandra Smith and her family. It was lovely/ nice to see them. I bought lots of souvenirs for the children. Thanh is always complaining about the heaviness of my suitcase. See you soon. Love, Quyen III. While-writing(15’) Ex 2: Imagine you are a tourist on vacation in a certain place/city in Vietnam. Write a postcard to a friend about your trip. You need to cover the information about. - T helps Ss to understand the requirement and the questions. - Ss write the postcard , using the questions as the instructions. - Ss write the postcard individually. - Ss goes around and helps ss to write the postcard. Dear Jane, I’m having a really good time in Hanoi, the capital of Vietnam. The people are hospitable and helpful and the weather has been wonderful: cool and sunny. In Hanoi, I visited some of my old friends, Tom and Sally. It was very nice to see them. We visited the History Museum and some art Galleries and had lunch together at a vegetarian restaurant. I bought a lot of souvenirs and postcards for you and other friends. See you soon, With love, Ann. IV. Post-writing (10’) - Ss change their postcards to find their friends’ mistakes in writing. - Ss read some postcards aloud in front of the class. - T helps ss correct the mistakes V.Consolidation : (1’) - T asks ss to retell some main points that we often write in a postcard. V.Homework (1’) - Write a postcard to a friend about your trip - Prepare: Unit 12 – Language focus/ P.119 Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 28 Period 80. Teaching date: March 7th, 2012. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Parts of lesson : Language focus.

(164) A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the past progressive, past progressive with When and While, progressive tenses with Always. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: The past progressive. The past progressive with When and While. The progressive tenses with Always. C/ Teaching aids : Cardboards , handouts .. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - T collects some essays thet ss do at home to check and mark. II / Language focus Activity1. The past progressive tense (20’) 1.1 The past progressive tense: S + was/ were + V(ing) => Ba was taking shower at eight o’clock last night. Use: Thì quá khứ tiếp diễn diễn tả + Sự kiện xảy ra ở một thời điểm cụ thể trong quá khứ. + diễn tả một sự việc đang xảy ra thì có một hành động khác xen vào. + diễn tả hai hoặc nhiều sự kiện xảy ra cùng một lúc -xong xong -ở quá khứ . Notes: Thì Qúa khứ tiếp diễn dùng với When, While, As để chỉ sự kiện đang diễn tiến. Ex: The Le family was sleeping when the mail man came. Ex 1 : The past progressive. - T asks ss to look at the picture, make sentences using the past progressive tense. - Ss work in pair to do the exercise. - Ss compare the answer with their partner. - T asks ss to write the answer on board. - T-ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. Keys: b.Hoa was having dinner at eight o’clock last night. c.Bao was doing his homeworks at eight o’clock last night. d.Nga was writing a letter at eight o’clock last night. e.Na was taking her dog for a walk at eight o’clock last night. f.Lan was talking/ bringing fruit to her grandfather/ bringing fruit at eight o’clock last night. Ex 2: The past progressive with When and While.(chart) - T asks ss to look at the picture, match the half- sentences in column A to those in column B.Write the full sentences. - Ss work in pair to do the exercise. - Ss compare the answer with their partner. - T asks ss to write the answer on board. - T-ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. Keys: b.While Hoa was eating, the phone rang. c.When Nam won the race, the crowd was cheering. d.Mrs. Thao was cooking when Tuan arrived home. e.When Lan arrived at school ,the School drum was sounding. f.It was raining when the plane got to HaNoi. Activity 2. The progressive tenses with Always (15’) Form: S + to be + always + V(ing) Example : Bao is always forgetting his homework..

(165) My was always talking in class. Use: Trạng ngữ Always được dùng với thì tiếp diễn để diễn tả sự kiện thường xuyên xảy ra với sự không hài lòng hay than phiền. Ex 3 : Complete the sentences - Asks Ss to open their books and complete the sentences. - Calls on some Ss to write the sentenceson board. - T – ssget feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. b.Mrs. Nga is always losing her umbrella. c.Mr. and Mrs. Thanh are always missing the bus. d.Nam is always watching T.V. e.Na is always talking on phone. f.Liem is always going out. III.Consolidation:( 4’) - T asks ss to use The past progressive,The past progressive with When and While, The progressive tenses with Always talking about themshelves. - Ss write on board. - T –ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. - T asks ss to retell the usage and the form of The past progressive,The past progressive with When and While, The progressive tenses with Always. IV / Homework : (1’) 1. Write the sentences using The past progressive,The past progressive with When and While, The progressive tenses with Always. 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . 3.Prepare the next lesson Unit 13- Getting started + Listen and read. ********************************************************************************* Unit 13: FESTIVAL I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be able to + ask for explanation of events. + give an account of something. + make compound words , reported speech. . + write a paragraph about what was done.. II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassettes III. Procedure : Lesson 1. Getting started Listen and read. Ss will be able to talk about the rice- cooking festival in Viet nam.. Lesson 2. Speak. Talk about the preparation for Tet and some festival.. Lesson 3. Listen. Listening for specific information about the preparation for Tet.. Lesson 4. Read. Reading the text to get the information from Christmas festival .. Lesson 5. Write. Lesson 6. Language focus. Writing a paragraph about what was done. Giving students further practice in using Passive,Compound words, reported speech.. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………….

(166) Teaching date: March 9th, 2012. Week 28 Period 81. Unit 13: FESTIVAL Parts of lesson : Getting started and Listen and read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to + know some traditional festivals in Viet nam such as the rice-cooking festival. + know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : (to) fetch, (to) yell, (to) urge, (to) rub, (to) participate, (to) award 2.Grammar: Compound words. C/ Teaching aids : Chart, pictures, cassette. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss makes 2 sentences with “always” using progressive tense. - T gets feedback and gives marks. II.Warm up (5’)- Getting started. - T asks ss give some places that visitors should go to. - Some people are going on their visits to Vietnam and they need advice on where to go . *Ex: Tom likes swimming and sunbathing. Where should he go ?.....................Why ?......................... T: give instructions : like/ dislike/ enjoy/ to be interested/ keen on/ to be font of + V - Ss answer - T – ss get feedback. III.Presentation: (15’) - T sets the scene: + T asks ss name some festival in Viat nam. + T asks ss to look at the picture and guess which festival are there in the picture. + Ss guess. “The rice-cooking festival” + T leads into new lesson.” We will know more about this festival in the lesson” - From the picture T presents some new words. - (to) fetch - (to) yell = to short loudly - (to) urge : make a person move more quickly - (to) rub - (to) participate - (to) award  Open prediction: Rice – cooking festival Water fetching. rice cooking. Fire making - Listen and repeat. - Repeat in chorally and individually. - T corrects the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. IV.Practice: (10’) - Ss listen to the tape twice. - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ss do the exercise in pairs..

(167) T / F statements a. Only one team member take part in the water. Fetching contest b. One person has to collect one water bottle c. Pieces of bamboo are used to make the fire d. In the final contest, the judges taste the rice Key: a. F b. F c. T d, F e. F f. T - T- ss gets feedback.  Grammar drill: (compound adjectives) A rice - cooking festival A water – fetching Competition article + noun + V_ing  Concept check Use: to form a compound adj Form: Noun + V_ing * Transformation drill:  Make/fire->A fire - making contest  Fight/bull->A bull – fighting festival  Make/car->A car – making industry  Arrange/flower->A flower – arranging contest  Export/rice->A rice – exporting country A clothes – washing machine V.Production: (7’)(chart) - T asks ss to ask and answer the questions. 1. How many competitions are there in the rice-cooking festival? 2.What’s the special about the fire-making contest? 3.How many people take part in the rice-cooking contest? - Ss presents their roles. - T – ss get feedback. 1.There are 3 competitions. 2. The special about the fire-making contest is two team members try to make a fire by rubbing pieces of bamboo together. 3. There are 6 people take part in the rice-cooking contest. - T asks ss to tell some festivals in Viet nam that you know. + A bull – fighting festival. + etc,... VI. Consolidation (1’)- Retell main points of the lesson. VII. Homework (1’) - Students rewrite 3 names of festivals - Let Ss do the exercises in the work book. - prepare new lesson: speak+listen Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: March 12th, 2012. Week 29 Period 82 Unit 13: FESTIVAL Lesson 2: Speak.

(168) A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - talk about preparations for a special event. - listen for details about preparing for Tet. - develop st’ speaking skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : tidy, tailor. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Chart, Text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss write words on board((to) fetch, (to) yell, (to) urge, (to) rub, (to) participate, (to) award, rice-cooking, fire-making, water- fetching) - T gets feedback and gives marks. II.Speaking: 1. Pre- speaking: (10’) - T sets the scene: - asks Ss to think of five things they often prepare for Tet and write them down on a piece of paper. Suggestions: - Decorate / clean / paint the house / the room / the yard.......... - From ss answer T leads into new lesson “ Today we will practice talking about our preparations for a special event. - T elicits ss some words. - tidy (V): don dep - tailor(N): tho may - Ss pronounce words. - T gets feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed.  Ordering: ( chart) A–F B–G C–H E–I D–J - Ss presents their roles. - T – ss get feedback. 2.Speaking: (20’)(Mapped dialogue) - T asks ss to make a similar dialogue talking about preparations for a special event. - Ss works in pairs. - T -ss feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. Mrs Quyen Lan A. You / tidies / bedroom? 1. Yes / where / going? B. Market / have to / oranges / 2. Could / collect / new Ao Dai tailor / pomegranates corner T asks ss to make a similar dialogue talking about preparations for a special event. - Ss works in pairs. * a school festival Hang: Have you swept the classroom? Tam: Yes, I have. Where are you going, Hang? Hang: To the market. I have to buy some color papers and some fruits. Tam: Could you buy me some juice cans? Hang: Sure, I will. Tam: Thanks, Hang. Is there anything else you want me to sweep? Hang: Not really. But I want our classroom to look nice at the festival..

(169) Tam: Ok. I know what to do now. We will decorate all the windows. Hang: That’s a good ideal. Bye Tam: Bye, Hang. 3. Post-speaking : (7’) - Ss make a similar dialogue talking about preparations for a special event. - ss can choose any festival in Viat nam that they know more to talk about. - Ss present their roles. - T- ss get feedback. - T asks ss to give the advantages and disadvantages of festival(groupwork.) - T- ss get feedback. III.Consolidation (2’) Retell main points of the lesson. VI. Homework (1’): - Practice again the dialogue at home. - Prepare new lesson : Listen Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: March 14th, 2012. Week 29 Period 83 Unit 13: FESTIVAL Lesson 3: Listen. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - listen for details about preparing for Tet. - develop st’ listening skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : tidy, Pomegranate, tailor,Peach blossoms, marigold, Dried watermelon seeds, Spring rolls. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Chart, Text book, cassette . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss make a dialogue talking about the preparation fot Tet. - T gets feedback ang give marks. II. Pre- listening: (10’) - T sets the scene: The Robinson family are making prepareration for Tet.They want to buy things for Tet.so what do you think they want to buy?Think of things people often want to have at Tet. - Ss guess. - T – ss get feedback. * Brainstorm : - decorate/ clean/ paint the house/ the room- buy cakes, candies, drink, food, fruits - Cook special meals/ make cakes/ get/ buy new dress - Write/ send postcard to friends, relatives - From ss answer T presents some new words. - Pomegranate ( Viet Namese ) quả lựu - Peach blossoms ( Viet Namese ) hoa đào - marigold ( Viet Namese ) hoa vạn thọ - Dried watermelon seeds ( Viet Namese ) hạt dưa - Spring rolls ( Viet Namese ) đồn chả . - Listen to the teacher and repeat in chorally and individually..

(170) * Check vocabulary: slap on the board. - Ss go to the board and slap. III. While – listening : ( 15’) - T asks ss to guess the answer. - Ss write their prediction on board. - Ss listen to the dialogue . Answer key a. Mr Robinson/ flower market b. traditional c. dried watermelon seeds d. make - T- ss give the answer and check if Ss’ guesses are right or not. - Ss Listen again and write down IV. Post – listening: (12’) - T hangs on the chart. - T asks ss to complete the table in pairs. - Ss complete the table. - T – ss get feedback.. Things to do Mr Robinson. -go to the flower market to buy peach blossom and a bunch of marigolds Mrs Robinson - Go to Mrs Nga’s to learn how to make spring rolls Liz - Go to the market to buy some candies and a packet of dried watermelon seeds. - T asks ss to asks and answer about What do their family often buy at Tet?What should we do/ eat to stay healthy at Tet? - Ss present their roles. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. V.Consolidation (2’) Retell main points of the lesson. VI. Homework (1’): - Practice again the dialogue at home. - Prepare new lesson : Read Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 29 Period 84. Teaching date: March 16th, 2012. Unit 13: FESTIVAL Lesson 4: Read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - get some knowledge about Christmas.. - develop ss reading skill. - know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : spread, spread,Christmas carol, Patron saint, Jolly,decorate, Santa Claus 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Chart, Text book, pictures. ..

(171) D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss write some words.( Peach blossoms, marigold, Dried watermelon seeds, Spring rolls, festival) - T gets feedback and gives marks. II.Pre-reading: (15’) - T sets the scene: - T shows some pictures and ask + What do you often do at Christmas? + When is Christmas held every year ? - (December 24th ) + Do you celebrate Christmas ? - Ss answer. - From ss answer ,T leads into new lesson and presents some words. - (to) spread : ( to cover a larger and larger area ) trải ra - (to) spread – spread – spread - Christmas carol: ( picture ) bài hát noel - Patron saint : ( Viet Namese ) thánh bảo hộ - jolly : ( happy and cheerful ) (mime) (adj ) vui vẻ - (to) decorate : ( mime) trang trí - Santa Claus : ( picture ) Ông gia Noel. - Listen to the teacher and repeat in chorally and individually. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistakes in pronunciation if needed. - T asks ss to match the half- sentences in column A to those in column B.(groupwork) * Matching: 1)Christmas Carol 2) Christmas card 3) Santa Claus 4) Christmas tree. a. also (Father Christmas) man with a white beard and dressed in red. b. evergreen or artificial tree decorated with Light at Christmas. c. greeting cards sent to friends at Christmas. d. a Christmas song of jolly.. * Answer key: 1. d 2. c 3. a 4. b III.While - reading: (13’) - Read the paragraphs on page 124 – 125 - Check if Ss’ answers are right or not.. -T ask ss to complete the table in pairs.(Ex1 p. 126) Christmas Specials ( The Christmas tree) ( The Christmas Card ) Christmas Carol. Place of origin Riga. Date ( early 1500s) ( England ) mid- 19 th century ( No information ( 800 years ) ago ) ( Santa Claus ) USA (1823) - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. IV.Post - reading: (10’) - T asks ss to ask and answer the question in pairs. - Ss presents their roles. Answer the questions (ex2 p. 126) 1. More than a century ago 2. He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends..

(172) 3. 800 years ago. 4. An American professor named Clement Clarke Moore. 5. On the description of Saint Nicholas in professor Moore’s poem. - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if necessary. - T asks ss to answer the question a.Do you like Christmas? b.What do you often do at Christmas? c.What do you often buy to decorate your house at Chrismas? - Ss presents their roles. - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if necessary. V. Consolidation (1’)Retell main points of lesson. VI. Homework (1’) - Write-it-up : Use the information in the grid to write the brief paragraphs. - Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook - Be ready lesson 5 “ Write ” Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: March 19th, 2012. Week 30 Period 85 Unit 13: FESTIVAL Lesson 5: Write. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - practice in writing a report. - develop ss writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: simple past tense. C/ Teaching aids : Chart, Text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - ss go to the board and write the new words. - Ss answer question a, b in the textbook . - T gets feedback and marks. II.Pre-writing: (15’) - T asks ss to look at the picture and guess what festival did they take part in? - the rice-cooking festival T helps ss to know the aim of this lesson.“ Today we will practice in writing a report.” - T asks to retell the rice-cooking festival. - T asks ss to complete the report, using the information in the dialogue on page 121(groupwork) - Ss read the report. - T- ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed.  Answer key 1. Rice – cooking 6. traditional 2. one / a 7. bamboo 3. Water – fetching 8. six 4. run 9. separate 5. water 10. added.

(173) * Understanding questions: (chart) 1. What does this report show? 2. Where was it held ? 3. How many competitions were there ? 4. What do each team do in each contest? 5. How was the festival ? -Ss answer the question about the report. - T- ss get feedback. 1.This report shows how the rice-cooking festival was held. 2.It was held in the communal house yard. 3.There were 3 competitions. 4.Each team had to get the water , make a fire , separate the husk and cook rice. 5. The festival was wonderful. -T helps ss to know how to write a report. + use the past simple tense. + summarize the main points . - T asks ss to write a similar report. * Use the chart: 1. Name of the festival 2. Where was it held ? 3. How long did it last ? 4. How many activities were there?Were there any competitions ? 5. How were the activities organized ? 6. How many people took part in each activity ? 7. What did you think about the festival ? III. While –writing: (15’) - Ss write the report. Eg: This report shows how the school festival was held. The festival was held in the schoolyard. There were two competitions: volleyball and jug of war In the volleyball game, the were six students in each team and each class had a volleyball team. The played against each other and the 9G team had most points got the grand prize. There were ten students who took part in the jug of war Each class had a team and the 9B team won all the others got the first prize. The school festival was wonderful. it made all the students love their school and study better. IV.Post – writing: (8’) - Ss present the report on a festival on the board. - T checks their mistakes. IV. Consolidation (1’) Retell main points of the lesson. V. Homework (1’) - Let students do the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 30 Period 86. Teaching date: March 21st, 2012 Unit 13: FESTIVAL Lesson 5: Language focus.

(174) A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice using + passive form + compound words + and reported speech. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: passive form, compound words, and reported speech. C/ Teaching aids : Chart, Text book, picture . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - T collects some reports that ss write at home to feedback and mark. II.New lesson: - T explains the requirements of the lesson 1.Activity 1: ( 15’)Passive voice *.Complete the sentences. Use the passive forms of the verbs in the box. - T reminds Ss of passive form. Passive form S + be + Past Participle - T explains the requirement of the exercise then Ss work in pairs to fill in the blank with the passive form of the verbs. - Ss state their sentences in front of the class. T gives the keys. a. were performed. b. was decorated/ put. c. is made. d. will be held. e. was awarded f. was written * Complete the conversation. Use the verbs in the box - T asks ss to observe the picture then complete the conversation using the verbs in the box. - Ss practice in pairs in front of the class. - T- ss give the key. 1. jumbled. 2. broken. 4. scattered. 5. pulled. 3. broken. 2. Activity 2: ( 15’)Compound words - Ss read the examples then give the form of compound words. - T explains what compound words are, asks them to give examples. Noun + Ving - Some compound words: rice-cooking, fire- making, car-making, bull-fighting - Ss read the definitions carefully. - Ss do the exercises in the textbooks( groupwork). - They exchange their sentences to find the mistakes. - Ss read each statement before the class..

(175) - T gives the feedback. a. It’s a fire-making contest. b. It’s a bull-fighting festival. c. It’s a car-making industry. d. It’s a flower-arranging contest. e. It’s a rice-exporting country. f. It’s a clothes-washing machine. 3.Activity 3:(10’) Reported speech - T reminds Ss of reported speech. - Gives them the rule how to change an indirect speech into a direct speech. Eg: He said:” I am late for school”  He said he was late for school. Notes: - Change personal pronoun, possessive pronoun. - Change tenses. Simple present  Simple past Present continuous Past continuous Present perfect  Past perfect Will/Can/May  Would/ Could/May - Change adverbs Tomorrow  the following day Yesterday  the previous day Today  that day Here  there This  that These  those - Ss do the exercises in the textbooks. Yesterday Lan’s grandmother, Mrs. Thu, needed a plumber. A man came to her door. Report what the man told Mrs. Thu. a. He said he was a plumber. b. He said he could fix the faucets. c. He said the pipes were broken. d. He said new pipes were very expensive. e. He said I had to pay him then. - They write each sentence on the board. - T gives the correct sentence..

(176) 4. Production (4’) - T asks ss to do the exercise in pairs. - Ss give the answer. - T –ss get feedback. * Change into reported speech.(chart) 1. “ I can’t swim very well” I told her. I told her I couldn’t swim very well. 2. Andrew said : “ I don’t want to go swimming” Andrew said he didn’t want to go swimming. III. Homework (1’) -. Do the exercise 5 in workbook.. -. Prepare the next lesson- Unit 14 : Getting started and listen and read.. *******************************************************************************. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson . Students will be able to + Know some famous places in the world. + seek informations of famous places in the world. +Prepare and complete a questionaire. +Recognize and correct mistakes in a tourist advertisement. + write a letter to s friend. II. Teaching aids : Text book, cards, pictures , cassettes III. Procedure : Lesson 1. Getting started Listen and read. Lesson 2. Speak. Lesson 3. Listen. Lesson 4. Read. Lesson 5. Write. Lesson 6. Language focus. Ss will be able to know some famous places in the world. Ask and answer to seek informations of famous places in the world. Listening for specific information to recognize and correct mistakes in a tourist advertisement Reading the text of wonders of the world.. Writing a a letter to s friend. Giving students further practice in using Passive, Indirect questions with If and Whether, Questions words before to – infinitives, Verb + to– infinitives. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 30. Teaching date: March 23rd, 2012.

(177) Period 87. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 1: Getting started, Listen and read A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to - know some famous places in the world. - know some new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : boring , bored, guess, clue, rule, pyramids, stonehenge, Golden Gate Bridge. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Picture, cassette, chart, text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - ss go to the board and change sentences into reported speech. 1. “I’m a student” Nga said. Nga said she was a student. 2. ‘ I will visit Na tomorrow”Hoa said Hoa said she would visit Na the following day. - T gets feedback and give marks. II. New lesson: 1. Warm up (5’)- Getting started - T- ss tell some interesting places in the world. - T hangs on the pictures. - Ss work in pairs then match the pictures to the names of the famous landmarks. Match the names of these famous world landmarks to the correct pictures a. The Pyramids. The Pyramids. Sydney opera House. Stonehenge. b. Sydney Opera house c. Stonehenge - T gives the correct answers and leads into new lesson. 2. Presentation (10’). Golden Gate Bridge.

(178) - T introduces the situation before they listen. Situation: Hoa, Nga and her cousin were bored. They decided to play a game called 20 questions. - T uses pictures to elicit and explain new words. Vocabulary - Bored (adj): She is bored with her job. - Boring (adj) The film is boring - Guess (v): - Clue (n): - Rule (n): - Golden Gate Bridge - The Pyramids - Stonehenge - Ss practice pronunciation. - Check vocabulary. 3. Practice (15’) - Ss listen to the tape again then repeat. - They practice the dialogue in a group of 3 then practice the dialogue in front of the class. - T corrects their pronunciation. - Ss read the dialogue in silence within 3 minutes. - They use words from the dialogue to complete the summary. Hoa, Nga and her cousin Nhi were bored, so Nga suggested that they play a game called 20 questions. She explained the rules and then the girls started to play. Nga thought of a place and she gave the others a clue by saying that it wasn’t in VietNam. Nhi found out the place was in America. Hoa thought it was the Golden Gate Bridge, but that is in San Francisco. Nhi was right when she said it was the Statue of Liberty. - Ss give the answer. - T - ss get feedback. 4. Production (8’) - Ss make up similar dialogues about The hanging garden of Babylon(playing the game -20 questions).. - Ss present their roles. - T gets feedback..

(179) 5. Consolidation: (1’) - T asks ss to retell the content of the text. III.Homework: (1’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Prepare the next lesson- lesson 2 : speak Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: March 26th, 2012. Week 31 Period 88. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 2:. Speak. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to: - Talk about some famous places in the world - Use reported speech for Yes-No questions. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : names of some wonders in the world. 2.Grammar: Reported speech for Yes-No questions. C/ Teaching aids : Picture, chart, text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss make the dialogue, using the game 20 questions. - T feedbacks and marks. II.Speak.() 1.Pre-speaking: (15’) - Ss look at some pictures then tell the names.. Great Barrier Reef. Halong Bay. Petronas Twin Towers. Great Wall.

(180) Eiffel Tower. Big Ben. - Ss think about 10 places, using Yes-No question to ask and answer. Is Phong Nha cave in Southern Viet Nam? Is PERTRONAS Twin towers the tallest building in the world? Is The Great Barrier Reef a World Heritage Site? - They practice the dialogue in pairs. Some pairs practice in front of the class. - T- ss get feedback. - T elicit ss structure – Reported speech with If and Whether. I asked Hoa if Phong Nha cave was in southern Viet Nam. She said that it wasn’t. I asked Nga whether PETRONAS Twin Towers in Malaysia was the highest building in the world. She said that it was. S + asked + O + If/Whether + S + V(PAST).. 2. While-speaking (15’) - T asks ss to read the examples. - Ss report what they have talk with their partner. -Ss present their roles. I asked Hoa if Great wall of china was in China. She said that it was. I asked Nga whether Eiffel Tower in England was the highest building in the world. She said that it wasn’t. - Some Ss practice in front of the class. - T helps them to speak naturally. - T – ss get feedback. 3. Post-speaking (7’) - Ss make the conversation freely. IV.Consolidation: (2’) - Ss retell the structure-Reported speech with If and Whether S + asked + O + If/Whether + S + V(PAST).. - T asks ss give examples. - SS write on board. - T gets feedback. V.Homework: (1’) - Write 5 Reported speech with If and Whether. - Prepare the next lesson “ listen”. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………….

(181) ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 31 Period 89 Lesson 3:. Teaching date: March 28th, 2012. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Listen + test 15 minutes. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to: - Listen to the conversation and correct the mistakes in the passage. -Know some new words. - Ss review some grammar points and vocabularies by doing the fifteen-minute test. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : southern, inn, jungle, crystal-clear, coral sea, snorkel. 2.Grammar: Reported speech for Yes-No questions. C/ Teaching aids : Picture, cassette, chart, text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - Ss make the dialogue, using the game 20 questions. - T feedbacks and marks. II.Pre-listening: (10’) - T explains the requirements of listening: There are four mistakes in this advertisement. Listen to the tape. Correct the mistakes. - T helps ss to know some new words. - inn (n): Quán trọ - jungle (n):rừng rậm - crystal-clear (adj): trong suốt như pha lê - coral sea (n) rặng san hô - snorkel (n): bơi lặn có ống thở - Ss practice pronunciation. - Check vocabulary. III. While-listening : (10’) - Sts listen to the tape twice then correct the mistakes in the passage. 1. southern  far North 2. inn  hotel 3. jungle  rain forest 4. 6824 3927  6924 3927.

(182) Do you want a quite, relaxing vacation? Look no further than beautiful far north Queensland. Stay right on the beach at the Coconut Palm Hotel. Take guided tours through the rainforest, swim in the crystal-clear water of the Coral Sea and snorkel amongst the coral of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park-a World heritage Site. Call 077 6924 3927 for more information. - T gets feedback from the students. - Some students read/write the words on the board. - T gives the correct sentences. IV. Post-listening : (4’) - Ss listen to the tape one more time then they retell the whole dialogue. - Ss retell the structure-Reported speech with If and Whether S + asked + O + If/Whether + S + V(PAST).. - T asks ss give examples. - SS write on board. - T gets feedback. V. Test 15(15’) - T delivers the test to ss. ĐỀ A I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1.There are three competitions: water –fetching, …………… and rice-cooking. a. a fire b.fire - make c. make a fire d.fire- making 2.An English-speaking ……………was held at Le Quy Don school last year. a. holiday b.vacation c.festival d. contest 3. My sister Trang is not very keen..............music. a.in b.up c.on d. to 4. Hoa’s father will pick her .............at the school. a.in b.up c.on d. to 5.The phone rang while I.................. a. watch b.is watching T.V c.to watch d.was watching T.V 6.Christmas songs were..............for people in towns and villages eight hundred years ago. a.perform b.performed c.performs d. performing 7. A few days before Christmas , people....................Christmas trees in their homes. a.decorate b.decorative c.decoration d. decorator 8. People make a fire in the ……………………way. a. traditional b. tradition c. traditionally d. traditionalist 9................ did you get up late?- Because I watched T.V late last night. a.What b.Why c.Which d.Where 10. Tim said he …………his pen on the way home. a. lose b. will lost c. lost d. is losing 11.Choose the underlined word ( A, B, C or D) that must be changed for the sentence to be correct. Lan must doing her homework before she listens to music. A B C D 12.................you ...............the bedrooms? – Yes, I have. a.Have / tidy b.Have / tidied c.Has / tidy d.Has / tidied II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. Hoa said “I’m a student”. (chuyển sang câu tường thuật) Hoa said................................................................................................................................ 2. Minh said “ He visited Hue yesterday”. (chuyển sang câu tường thuật).

(183) Minh said............................................................................................................................ 3.Viet Nam is a country which exports a lot of rice.( Dùng danh từ ghép để viết lại câu) Viet Nam is a ..................................................................................................................... 4. He writes a letter to Thao. (chuyển sang câu bị động) A letter................................................................................................................................. ĐỀ B I.Choose the best answer : (6ms) 1.There are three competitions: water –fetching, …………… and rice-cooking. a. a fire b. fire- making c. make a fire d. fire - make 2.An English-speaking ……………was held at Le Quy Don school last year. a. holiday b. contest c.festival d. vacation 3. My sister Trang is not very keen..............music. a.up b.in c.on d. to 4. Hoa’s father will pick her .............at the school. a.in b.to c.on d. up 5.The phone rang while I.................. a. watch b.was watching T.V c.to watch d.is watching T.V 6.Christmas songs were..............for people in towns and villages eight hundred years ago. a.perform b.performing c.performs d. performed 7. A few days before Christmas , people....................Christmas trees in their homes. a. decorative b. decorate c.decoration d. decorator 8. People make a fire in the ……………………way. a. traditionally b. tradition c. traditional d. traditionalist 9................ did you get up late?- Because I watched T.V late last night. a.Why b.What c.Which d.Where 10. Tim said he …………his pen on the way home. a. lose b. will lost c. lost d. is losing 11.Choose the underlined word ( A, B, C or D) that must be changed for the sentence to be correct. Lan must doing her homework before she listens to music. A B C D 12.................you ...............the bedrooms? – Yes, I have. a.Have / tidy b.Have / tidied c.Has / tidy d.Has / tidied II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 4ms) 1. Lan Anh said “I’m a doctor”. (chuyển sang câu tường thuật) Lan Anh said................................................................................................................................ 2. Quan said “ He visited Ha Noi yesterday”. (chuyển sang câu tường thuật) Quan said............................................................................................................................ 3. Viet Nam is a country which exports a lot of rice.( Dùng danh từ ghép để viết lại câu) Viet Nam is a ..................................................................................................................... 4. She writes a letter to Thai. (chuyển sang câu bị động) A letter................................................................................................................................. Keys. ĐỀ A I.Choose the best answer : (0.5m x 12=6ms) 1d 2c 3c 4b 5d 6b 7a 8a 9b 10c 11A 12b II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 1m x 4= 4ms) 1. Hoa said she was a student. 2. Minh said he had visited Hue the previous day/ the day before.. 3. Viet Nam is a rice-exporting country. 4. A letter is written to Thao by him. ĐỀ B.

(184) I.Choose the best answer : (0.5m x 12=6ms) 2b 3a 4d 5b 6d 7c 8c 9a 10d II.Rewrite the sentences: ( 1m x 4= 4ms) 1. Lan Anh said she was a doctor. 2. Quan said he had visited Ha Noi the previous day/ the day before.. 3. Viet Nam is a rice-exporting country. 4. A letter is written to Thai by her. 1b. 11A. 12c. VI.Homework: (1’) - Write 5 Reported speech with If and Whether. - Prepare the next lesson “ Read”. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: March 30th, 2012. Week 31 Period 90. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 3:. Read. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to: - Practice comprehensive skill to get main information. - Know more information about the seven wonders of the world. - review some knowledge that they have learn. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : compile, temple, honor, religious, royal. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Picture, chart, text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - T asks ss write the words : southern, inn, jungle, crystal-clear, coral sea, snorkel. - T gets feedback and give marks. II.Procedure: 1.Pre-reading (15’) - T hangs on the picture. - Ss tell some wonders which you know..

(185) Pyramid Some wonders in the world. Great Wall. Taj Mahal. The hanging Gardens of Babylon in Iraq. -The Statue of Zeus in Greece. -The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt. - The Great Wall of China. - The Taj Mahal in India. - The Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco, USA. - Angkor Wat in Cambodia. Can you tell something about it? - T lead into new lesson: Today we will find out some wonder of the world centuries ago. - T gives new words by using pictures, examples, and definitions. - claim(v): - compile(v): - religious(adj)  religion (n) - royal (adj): - the next three centuries - the early 15th century - Practice pronunciation. - Check vocabulary. 2.While-reading (15’) - Ss read the lesson within 3 minutes. - Ss work in pairs to choose the best answer. - Ss give the answer. - T- ss get feedback. a. (C) The only surviving wonder on Antipater’s list is the Pyramid of Cheops. b. (A) Angkor Wat was originally built for Hindu. c. (D)Ankor Wat was part of a royal Khmer city a long ago. d. (B) In the 1400s, the Khmer King chose Phnom Penh as the new capital. - T hangs on the chart. - T asks ss to answer the questions in pairs. 1. Who compiled a list of the seven wonders of the world? - Antipater of Sidon compiled a list of the seven wonders of the world 2. Which is the greatest temple in the world? - Angkor Wat is the greatest temple in the world. 3. When was the temple built?.

(186) - The temple was built in around the year 1100. 4. What used to be the royal capital city? - Angkor Thom used to be the royal capital city. 5. When did the Khmer rulers move to Phnom Penh? - The Khmer rulers moved to Phnom Penh in the early 15th century. - Ss answer. - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. 3.Post-reading (8’) - Play a game. G1: tell some information about one of the seven wonders. G2: tell the name of the wonder. For example: G1: It is a Hindu and Buddhist temple at Angkor, old capital of the Khmer Kingdom. G2: It is Angkor Wat. Angkor Wat 4.Consolidation: (1’) - Ss retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework (1’) - Learn by heart the new words. - Prepare the next lesson “Write”. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: April 2nd, 2012. Week 32 Period 91. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 5:. Write. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to: -Practice how to write a letter to a friend..

(187) - Develope writing skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: Write a report, using suggested questions. C/ Teaching aids : chart, text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) Sts read the lesson then answer these questions. 1. Tell some wonders. 2. When was Angkor Wat built? - T gets feedback and marks. II. Pre-writing (15’) - T asks Ss some questions to lead in the lesson. Do you remember the way of writing a friendly letter? - Ss answer and T feedbacks. - T explains the requirements of the exercise. Ss read the letter to fill in the blanks with the correct sentences.(groupwork) *. Complete the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his trip to the Grand canyon. Insert the letters of the missing sentences. 1. (C) I hope you are studying hard for your exams next week. 2. (B) The Canyon is part of Grand Canyon National park and it was formed by the Colorado River over millions of years. 3. (D) He also talked about the original inhabitants who lived there during the Stone Age. 4. (A) That’s all I have time to tell you about - One student reads the key in front of the class. - T gives the key. III. While-writing (15’) - T helps Ss to understand the requirement and begin to write a letter to a friend. Ss write the letter, using the instructions. - They change their letter to find their friends’ mistakes in writing. *. Write a letter to a friend. Tell him/ her about a place you have visited recently..

(188) Phong Nha cave Place: Phong Nha Cave, Ha Long Bay Distance from your city: How to get there: Sights: Weather: How you feel: IV. Post-writing (8’) - T collects some letters and corrects. - Ss write their writing into their notebooks. V.Consolidation: (1’) - Retell the way to write a friendly letter. VI. Homework (1’) - Write another letter to a friend. Tell him/ her about a place you have visited recently. - Prepare the next lesson “Language focus”. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 32 Period 92 Lesson 6:. Teaching date: April 4th, 2012. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Language focus. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to have a good chance to practice passive form, questions words before to infinitive, verb + to-infinitive, and reported speech. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: Passive form, compound words, reported speech. C/ Teaching aids : chart, text book . D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork. E / Procedure : I.Check-up: ( 5’) - T collects some letters that Ss write at home and marks. II.Activity 1: (10’)Passive form - Play a game..

(189) G1 say verbs in Infinitive form. G2 say verbs in Past participle - T reminds Ss of passive form. S + be + Past Participle - T explains the requirement of the exercise then Ss work in pairs to fill in the blank with the passive form of the verbs. - Ss state their sentences in front of the class. - T gives the keys. * Complete the sentences. Use the passive forms of the verbs in the box. b. was constructed c. was designed d. was presented e. was reached III.Activity 2: (10’)Indirect questions with if and whether - T reminds Ss of Indirect questions with if and whether. S + asked + O + If/Whether + S + V(PAST).. - T explains the requirement of the exercise then Ss work in pairs to do the exercise in group. - Ss write on board. - T- s get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. b. Nhi asked nga if it was far from Hanoi. c. Nhi asked Nga whether My son was in Quang Nam province. d. Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at My Son IV.Activity 3: (8’)Questions words before to-infinitives - T helps ss to know the way to use Questions words before to-infinitives. Examples: Where to go, what to do, how to get to the station,.. What / where / how...+ to-infinitive - T explains the requirement of the exercise then Ss work in pairs to do the exercise. - Ss write on board. b. Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets. c. Nga pointed out where to buy souvenirs. d.Nga advised Nhi how to go from My son to Hoi An. e. Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit. - T- s get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. V.Activity 4 (7’)Verb + to infinitive - T gives ss some verbs followed by to-infinitive:Want, decide, hope, attempt, promise, agree, plan, aim, afford, manage, refuse, arrange, learn, fail. - Ss do the exercise in pairs. 1. jog 2. go 3. to gather 4. to rain5. to reach. 6. to continue. They exchange their sentences to find the mistakes..

(190) Ss read each statement before the class. T gives the feedback. VI.Consolidation (2’) - Ss retell the main points of the lesson. + Passive form The contract must be signed by the manager today +Indirect questions with if and whether. Ann asked Mai if / whether she liked flowers. +Questions words before to-infinitive.: She doesn’t know where to go. + Verb+ to-infinitive: She wants to buy a bike. VII.Homework : (1’) - Learn the words and grammar points that they learn at Unit 12, 13, 14 to prepare for the forty-five minute test . Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 33 Period 94. Teaching date: April 9th, 2012. Unit 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 1: Getting started & listen and read. A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to operate the computers and use the computers. Moreover, they can know the computers’s advantages, give some ideas and say agreement and disagreement. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : Connect, Printer, Manual, plug, guarantee, socket. 2.Grammar: - Use present perfect with “yet” and “already”. C/ Teaching aids : Chart, pictures, cassette. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I. Warm-up:(5’) (Getting started) - Ask Ss to say something about “computers” what they know. - Ss can speak Vietnamese after that translate into English. - Ask Ss to make a list of how computers can help us. - Computers save time. - Computers help us learn interestingly. - Computers are convenient/ easy for keeping/ storing information. - Computers are very quick in giving answers to our questions. II. Listen and read: 1.presentation : ( 15’) - Set the scene: Give the situation of dialogue (guess the meaning of the content) - T: Nam and his father are talking about how to operate the computers .we are going to see the computers’s advantages, give some ideas and say agreement and disagreement..

(191) - Introduce some new words: +. Connect(v). -> explain. +. Printer (n). -> picture. + Manual (n) -> explain + Plug(n) ->picture + guarantee(n) ->explain + socket(n) -> explain + I know how to connect a printer -> translation - Ss pronounce words. - T gets feedback. 2.Practice: (15’) - Play the tape twice. - Let Ss to practice in pairs. - Corrects their mistakes. - Explains “ Fact” and “Opinion” and check () the boxes. - Ss do the exercise. - T gets feedback. a.Fact b.O c.O d.O e.F f.F - T asks ss to answer the questions inpairs.(chart) - T – ss get feedback. a.What are they talking about? - about the problem of the computer. b. What happens to the printer? - The printer didn’t work. c.Is the computer under guarantee?- Yes, it is. - T asks ss to give the way to use the computer in our real life/ at school that save power and what information , web page ss should read or not. - Ss answer. - T- ss get feedback. 3. Production: (8’) - Review the present perfect tense. - Gives present perfect tense to use “yet” and “already” * Already: Express an action happened in the past and last in the present but not finish Ex: I’ve already seen it. * Yet: Usually at the end of the sentences - Ask Ss to write sentences with the present perfect: “yet” and “already” - Ss write on board. - T gets feedback and corrects the mistakes if needed. 4.Consolidation: (1’) - Retell the content of the dialogue. - Review the present perfect tense. V. Homework: (1’) - Learn by heart new word and new structure. - Make 5 sentences with “yet” and “already”. - Prepare new lesson - Speak Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 33. Teaching date: April 11th, 2012.

(192) Period 95. Unit 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 2: SPEAK A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and disagreement. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar: express agreement and disagreement C/ Teaching aids : Chart, pictures. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I.Check up (5’) - Ss write the new words and make 2 sentences using present perfect. - T gets feedback and marks. II. Pre-speaking: (15’) * Braistorm: - Write the topic on the board: Useful expressions to express agreement and disagreement. - Put the able on the board and elicit sts’answer then write them on the table. - Explain the phrase “on the other hand” to sts. - Get sts to copy the table. Opinions I like ................... I don’t like ........... I think ................. I feel ................... I don’t believe ...... Agreement So do I ........................ ........................ ......................... Degree of agreement I agree but ................ .................................... Disagreement I disagree .......................... ........................... *Matching: - Put the photocopied pictures on p.139 on the right of board and the word cues on the left (not in order). - Run through. - Ask sts to match the words with the right pictures. - Call on sts to match and correct. Picture a - Playing the rain Picture b - Driving a car Picture c - Foreign food Picture d - Reading comic books III. While-speaking: (15’) * Picture drill: - Erase the words but leave the pictures. - Get a student to demonstrate the model (a). T: I think driving a car is easy. Ss: I diagree. I think it’s difficult to drive a car. (or) So do I. - Ask sts to use the adjectives in the box on p.140 to express their opinions after going through the meaning of some new words. `1/ entertaining 2/ time-consuming 3/ challenging - Have sts to use the pictures on the board to practice speaking with their partners..

(193) - Work in pairs. - Call on five pairs to read out. - Give feedback and correct. IV. Post-speaking: (8’) * Mapped dialogue: - Present the dialogue and have sts repeat, sentence by sentence. - Ask sts read out the dialogue. - Have sts make similar dialoues refering the cues on p.140 (below the dialogue) to replace the information. - Put the map dialogue chart on the board. I am having problems with .... What’s wrong? It doesn’t work. I think .... No, You didn’t .... Oh! Sorry. V.Consolidation: (1’) - Retell some common useful expressions to express agreement and disagreement. VI. Homework: (1’) - Prepare for Listen. - Do exercise 1 in workbook. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Week 33 Period 96. Teaching date: April 13th, 2012. Unit 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 3: LISTEN + Correcting the forty-five minute test. A. Aims and Objectives: After finishing the lesson, Ss will be able to + improve their listen skills and listening comprehension + learn some more new words. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : process, procedure, drain, convey, fiber. 2.Grammar: expr C/ Teaching aids : Chart, pictures. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork. E / Procedure : I. Pre-listening: (10’) - In the previous lesson, you learned the chocolate making process. Today we will learn how to make paper. - Ask Ss to guess the missing words in each gaps. - T presents some new words. - T helps ss to pronounce words. II. While-listening: (10’) - Let them listen to the tape twice - Check and correct Keys: 1. simple; 2. same; 3. two hundred; 4. left; 5. rollers. - Ask them to listen again. Then put the sentences into the correct order. - Check and correct..

(194) III. Post-listening: (5’) - T asks ss to retell the way to make the paper. - T –ss get feedback. VI. Correcting the test: (20’) - T comments the tests. - T points some mistakes in the test out. - T helps ss to go over the test. ĐỀA I / II (0,25m X 16= 4ms) Question 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Answer C A B B C B C. 8 B. 9 B. 10 A. 11 D. 12 B. 13 14 D A. 15 C. 16 C. III. Read the passage A. Write True or False : (0,5m X 4 =2ms) 1.T 2.T 3.F 4.F B.Answer the questions; (0,5m X 2 =1m) VI. A. Rewerite the sentences (0,5m X 4 = 2ms) 1. I asked Hoa if hes brother liked playing sports. 2. Lan said she was a doctor” 3. She showed me how to go to the station. 4. English is spoken by Nhi fluently/ English is spoken fluently by Nhi. V.Listen : (0,25 x 4 = 1m) 1a 2a 3d 4d Tape transcript: And here is today’s weather forecast for the international traveler. 1. Let’s start with Ha noi. It will be a dry day in Hanoi , and hot.For the tempareture, the low will be twenty and the high will be twenty -six degrees. 2. London will be cold and humid, with a low of minus three and high of seven. 3. Paris is going to have a cool and dry day, with a low of ten degrees and a high of sixteen. ĐÁP ÁN Đ Ề KI ỂM TRA 1 TI ẾT LỚP 8(L ẦN II–HKII)(2011-2012) ĐỀB I / II (0,25m X 16= 4ms) Question 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Answer A D C A A C A D C D A C A III. Read the passage A. Write True or False : (0,5m X 4 =2ms) 1.T 2.T 3.F 4.F B.Answer the questions; (0,5m X 2 =1m) VI. A. Rewerite the sentences (0,5m X 4 = 2ms) 1.I asked Hoa if hes brother liked playing sports. 2. Lan said she was a doctor” 3. She showed me how to go to the station. 4. English is spoken by Nhi fluently/ English is spoken fluently by Nhi.. 14 B. 15 D. 16 C. V.Listen : (0,25 x 4 = 1m) 1a 2a 3d 4d Tape transcript: And here is today’s weather forecast for the international traveler. 1.Let’s start with Ha noi. It will be a dry day in Hanoi , and hot.For the tempareture, the low will be twenty and the high will be twenty -six degrees. 2.London will be cold and humid, with a low of minus three and high of seven. 3.Paris is going to have a cool and dry day, with a low of ten degrees and a high of sixteen..

(195) V. Homework: - Learn by heart new words. - Do exercises in book. - Find more inventions and their origin. - Do exercise 1 in workbook. Rút kinh nghiệm: …………………………………………………………………………………… ........................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... …………… Teaching date: April 16th, 2012. Week 34 Period 97. Unit 15 : COMPUTERS Lesson 4: READ A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - know more about how computers work in a university. - know some new words. - develope student’s reading skill. B/ Language contents: 1.Vocabulary : freshman, bulletin, jack, restrict, degree, skeptical, concern, requirement. 2.Grammar: C/ Teaching aids : Chart. D/ Teachnique: eliciting, pairwork, groupwork.. E / Procedure : I.Check up (5’) - T asks ss to write the new words(insert, sequence, access, programer, power button, flow chart, get sth from.) - T gets feedback and marks. II. Pre-reading: (15’) - T sets the scene: Brainstorming Listen to music Store information. watch T.V Computers can help us. learn English. - Today we will study another advantage of computer.Let’s find this in the text. - T elicits ss some new words. 1. Vocabulary: - freshman (n): = first - year student. - restrict(v) : (example) - bulletin (n): (example) - degree (n) : (example) - jack (n): (situation) - skeptical (adj) : (example) - requirement (n): (example) - Concern (n) (translation) - T helps ss to pronounce words. - Ss pronounce and T gets feedback. - Checking vocabulary: What and Where. 2. T/ F statement: - T hangs on the poster on the board. - T lets sts look at this, read then predict which one is true or which one is false..

(196) Statements 1/ There is a new university without a library in the USA recently. 2/ Users can send and receive messages by using computers. 3/ First-year students in many universities are required to have access to a computer. 4/ Students have to go to computer rooms to connect their computers to computer jacts 5/ Computer bulletin boards are the same as the traditional ones. 6/ Not all people think positively about the new method of study off campus. - Write sts’s predictions on the board. III. While-reading: (15’) 1. Checking sts’guess: - T asks sts open their books on p.141. -T -ss read the text to check and give the right answer. a.T b.T c.T d.F e.T f.T - T asks sts correct the false statements.(dành cho lớp 8A) - T – ss get feedback and correct the mistakes if needed. 2. Lucky number: 1(b) 2(LN) 3(a) 4(LN) 5(c) 6(d) 7(e) 8(LN) - T explains sts how to play this game. - T devides class into two teams. - Ss answer the question in pairs. - Ss write the questions on board. * Questions: 1-b What type of information is available through the computer? 2. Lucky number 3-a. What make the new university different from others? 4. Lucky number 5-c .What type of equipment is necessary for first-year students? 6-d. What is the difference between a traditional bulletin board and the one on the internet? 7-e. Would you like to complete a college degree from home? Why/ Why not? 8. Lucky number a. The new university has no library makes it different from the others. b. All the information is availablethrough the computer. c. First- year students have access to a computer. d.The different is students can sit in front of the computer and get the information at home. e.Yes, I would. (student’s answer) IV. Post-reading: (8’) * Discussion: - T devides class into six groups. - T asks ss to talk about advantages and disadvantages of using computers. - T calls on sts go to the board to write down.. - T correct mistakes if needed. Using computer advantages - quickly. V.Consolidation : (1’). Disadvantages - influence on eyes.. T. F.

(197) - Ss retell the content of the text. VI. Homework: (1’) - Prepare for Write. - Learn new words..

(198)

giao an anh van 8 toan tap

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về